✕

Manual

Introduction

This documentation is your in-depth Manual on everything J.SHOW has to offer, such as the wide variety of functions, permissions, notifications, and other complex topics for the most streamlined professional touring experience.

This documentation is dynamic and ever evolving, as we continuously update and expand it.

About J.SHOW

Welcome Legends!

J.SHOW is your all-in-one Tour Production App — built for artists, agencies, and live event pros who are ready to streamline the chaos! From planning shows and coordinating teams to tracking deals, generating contracts, and managing logistics — J.SHOW brings it all into one beautifully organized digital space.

Whether you’re an independent artist or a full-blown agency repping multiple acts, J.SHOW gives you the structure, flexibility, and control to keep your show on the road — and your head in the creative game.

We offer two types of Platforms, the Artist Platform and the Agency Platform.

Both Platforms come with their own customizable subdomains (eg. xyz.j.show).

About the Agency Platform

Are you an Agency working for multiple Artists? Start here!

If you are managing more than a few Artists, getting an Agency Platform is the foundation of your operations. From here, you can add any number of Artist Platforms.

All Artist Platforms connected to a particular Agency Platform share a centralized Database for Venues, Promoters, and Accommodations, ensuring a smooth and efficient workflow.

The price for an Agency Platform is 499€ (EU) · USD 699 (US/World) · USD 499 (Asia) net / Year

Important: The Agency Platform serves as the central hub for your agency, but it does not include any Artist Platforms. A separate Artist Platform is required for each artist you represent. See Pricing Guide for a pricing example.

The Agency Platform is available for desktop browsers only.

Note: Multiple Agency Platforms may be granted access to the same Artist Platform.

About the Artist Platform

The Artist Platform is where the true life of a Tour Production takes place.

The Artist Platform can be created by either Agencies working with multiple Artists, or by independent Artists.

We offer two options for Artist Platforms:

➀ The price for a Basic Artist Platform is 199€ (EU) · USD 299 (US/World) · USD 199 (Asia) net / Year

➁ The price for a Pro Artist Platform is 349€ (EU) · USD 499 (US/World) · USD 349 (Asia) net / Year

The Pro Version includes everything the Basic Version has to offer, PLUS the following additional features:

Both available in a full desktop version. The Artist Platform is also available as a limited smartphone version for iOS and Android.

J.SHOW Pricing Guide

For a detailed overview of the licensing process and pricing structure, please visit our Pricing Guide.

Abbreviations and markings

To save space, the interface uses abbreviations and colors. This page explains them: what tbc stands for, what a CP is, why an entry shows up in orange.

TIP: There is a ? button at the top of the event list. It opens the color legend inside the platform itself.

Abbreviations

AbbreviationMeaning
tbcShort for to be confirmed: the event has been agreed but is not yet fixed. The tag is attached to the event automatically — in the event list, in the title, in the calendar and in the calendar subscription — and disappears as soon as the status is set to confirmed. It is not a separate field and cannot be switched off on its own.
optShort form of the status option: the day is being held, the confirmation is still pending.
tbaShort for to be announced: the event is set, but has not been announced publicly yet.
anShort form of announced: the event has been announced publicly.
CPContact Person — not Artist Pass. There are CP Venue, CP Technol., CP Partner, CP Other and, in the finance area, CP billing.
TM · A · C+ · C · GThe permission levels Tourmanagement, Artist, Crew+, Crew and Guest. The abbreviations appear wherever the full name of the permission level does not fit — next to a schedule in the templates, for instance, or next to a box on the dashboard. They tell you who is allowed to see it.
GLGuest list.

Event status

StatusMeaning
confirmedThe event is fixed.
not yet confirmed (tbc)Agreed, but not yet fixed.
optionThe day is being held, the confirmation is still pending.
ideaSomething you are considering — nothing has been agreed yet.
closedPlayed and settled. Past events with this status appear faded in the event list.
canceledNot taking place. The event stays in the list for the record and is shown struck through.
to be postponedBeing moved to a date that is not yet known. The event keeps all its data, but crew confirmations are withdrawn — nobody is scheduled for that day any more.

The announcement is a separate matter: an event can be confirmed and still not be public. That is what tba (not announced yet) and announced are for.

Event type abbreviations

Every event has a type. The event list shows only its abbreviation.

AbbreviationEvent type
CNCRTConcert
TOURTour
FSTVLFestival
RHRSLRehearsal
PROMOPromo
OFFOff Day
TRVLTravel
SHOWShow
PREPPreparing
SUPRTSupport
PRVWPreview
FEATFeature
SETUPSet Up
TRDWNTear Down
WRAPWrap-up

On top of these, every platform can create its own event types with their own abbreviations (Linking templates to event types). Those cannot appear in this list.

Colors and markings

MarkingMeaning
tbcNot confirmed yet. Throughout the platform, orange means “waiting for confirmation”.
to be postp.The event is to be moved, but no new date has been set yet. Red, because the day no longer counts as booked.
Name in italics on the guest listAn entry that still needs to be confirmed (a request). It only counts towards the total, the PDF and the export once confirmed. On a phone the row also has an orange background.
Check mark in gray, orange, blue or redA person’s answer to a request: gray — no answer yet, orange — maybe, blue — accepted or booked, red — declined.
canceledStruck through: the event has been canceled.
Faded row in the event listA past event with the status completed.
Days highlighted gray, green, orange or red in the calendarA tour block. Whoever creates the block picks the color freely — it has no fixed meaning.
+1h / −1hA badge next to the date in the basic information: the event is in a different time zone than the previous day, and the clock moves forward or back by this amount. The tooltip names both time zones.
Blue bar next to a box inside an eventSomething has changed in that section. The bar is shown per person and disappears once they have seen the change.

The legend for the dots, squares and warning triangles in the event list is also available inside the platform: event list → ? → Status and Color Code.

Other terms

TermMeaning
Radius ClauseA radius around a venue: within a defined distance and period, no second event should take place. J.SHOW checks this and reports possible conflicts.
Also protect announcementsPart of the radius clause: a period in which no announcement of another event should be made within the radius either. Such a conflict is flagged with the addition (Announcement).
NIGHTLINERThe tour bus. Where a distance carries this label, the route is calculated for that vehicle — NL + TRAILER for the bus with a trailer. The Parking spot for nightliners is the parking space for it at the venue.
announcedAnnounced publicly. An event can be confirmed and still not be published. On the release date you set, it becomes public automatically and then also appears on a connected website.

Getting Started with J.SHOW

Creating an Agency Platform

To create your own Agency Platform, go to install.j.show and enjoy a FREE 30-day trial of our all-inclusive service — no strings attached!

Click on Agency Platform.

Choose your preferred subdomain.

Note: Choose your subdomain carefully: later on it can be changed at most once a year, see Changing the subdomain.

Enter the name of your Agency and your Email Address.

Click Create Agency Platform to complete setup.
A registration link will be sent to your email.

You’re ready to go!

Creating an Artist Platform

There are two ways to create an Artist Platform — depending on whether you're registering independently or from within an Agency Platform.

➀ To create an Artist Platform as an independent artist, go to install.j.show and enjoy a FREE 30-day trial of our all-inclusive service — no risk, no commitment!

Click on Artist Platform.

Choose your preferred subdomain.

Note: Choose your subdomain carefully: later on it can be changed at most once a year, see Changing the subdomain.

Enter the Artist Name and your Email Address.

Click Create Platform.
A registration link will be sent to your email.

Let’s go!

➁ To create an Artist Platform within an Agency Platform, click + Platform in the top navigation and follow the same steps listed above.

Creating a PRO Artist Platform

If you’d like to upgrade an existing Artist Platform to the PRO version, follow these simple steps:

Log in to the Artist Platform.

Go to SETTINGS.

On the left-hand side, choose either TRY PRO FOR 30 DAYS or UPGRADE TO PRO.

You can cancel the PRO upgrade at any time under SETTINGS on the left-hand side. It then keeps running until the end of your license period, after which BASIC applies. Before your first invoice, the cancellation takes effect from that invoice, which comes at the Basic price. If your license period has already ended and the invoice for the next one has not yet been issued, the platform switches to BASIC immediately. If your platform is billed through an agency, this is only possible during the Pro trial. Buying PRO again later lifts a pending cancellation.

Email Verification

After registering on a J.SHOW platform, you will receive an email verification link to confirm your email address.

Check your inbox for an email from J.SHOW and click the verification link.

Once verified, your email status is confirmed and you can access all platform features.

Note: If you haven't received the verification email, check your spam folder or request a new link from your profile settings.

Linking an Artist Platform to an Agency Platform

If an already existing independent Artist Platform would like to be integrated into an Agency Platform, please contact support@j.show for further assistance.

After a platform move – into an agency, out of one, or when restoring from the archive – J.SHOW asks every person once to agree to their data being passed on to the new data controller: by email and at the next login in the “Important Information” window. Accept and continue lets you work as usual; Decline and delete profile permanently deletes your profile on this platform – profiles on other platforms are not affected.

Until a person has agreed, their profile on this platform is hidden: they do not appear in people lists, travel parties, the calendar or the global search, and the platform sends them no emails and no push notifications – only the request for consent and, if needed, the email for resetting the password. Their calendar subscription stays empty until then and fills up by itself after they agree. Anyone who has not responded after seven days gets one reminder.

If you are the only Admin of an independent platform, J.SHOW warns you before you decline: afterwards no one could manage people, permissions and settings. So give another person the Admin permission level first. If you decline anyway, J.SHOW support is notified automatically and sorts out with the platform who becomes Admin.

Crew Access & User Profiles

Crew Access & User Profiles: Registration, Invites & Notifications

Getting Started: How to Register

You will receive an email invitation to join an Artist Platform.

Open the email and click JOIN NOW.

You will be prompted to create a password.

Click REGISTER to finish.

You can now log in via browser and/or use the J.SHOW App — either on your smartphone or by visiting app.j.show.

Editing Your Profile

After logging in for the first time, you’ll be prompted to review your Profile.
Click EDIT PROFILE and fill in any relevant details, such as:

Optional settings:

You can also:

Changing your email address: Your profile shows your address with a pencil next to it – on a computer in your profile, on a phone via EDIT PROFILE, in the app in the Edit profile window between last name and phone. Clicking it opens “Change email address”: enter the New email address and your Password and choose under “Change on these platforms:” where the new address should apply – all platforms you use with this address are preselected. After Send code we send a six-digit code to the new address. It is valid for 15 minutes; enter it and confirm with Change email address. Your password stays the same.

As soon as the new address is confirmed, we send the message ‘Your J.SHOW email address has been changed’ to your previous address (it shows the new address only partially). If that wasn't you, contact J.SHOW support right away.

Your two-factor login and your universal calendar link move with you – no need to set either up again. If you select only some platforms, you log in there with the new address and on the others with your previous one; two-factor login then applies to both addresses, and the universal calendar link stays with the previous one. In the app you stay logged in with your previous address in that case – for the switched platforms, also log in with the new one (ADD ANOTHER ACCOUNT). If the same address also has an agency login, not all platforms can be switched at once; please contact J.SHOW support.

Languages spoken and qualifications: Your profile has two lists to which you can add as many entries as you like – using the + right after Qualifications or Languages spoken. Each entry then appears as a gray box; clicking it opens it again for editing or deleting. As with the frequent flyer programs, every entry is saved right away.

Languages spoken: Under Language, pick a language from the list – each one is shown in its own name, on a computer and on a phone followed by your name for it in brackets (e.g. “Español (Spanish)”). If it is missing, choose Other language and type in the Name of the language yourself. Under Level you choose Native, Fluent or Basic; the level is optional. A native language is shown in bold in its box.

The language you use J.SHOW in (the Language field further up in your profile) appears in your languages spoken automatically – at first without a level. Set the level there yourself. If you switch the interface language, this entry switches with it: the previous language drops out and the new one is added. If you have entered a level for the previous language, it stays.

Qualifications: Each entry has a Name (required, e.g. rope rescue or forklift license), optionally a Certificate (such as the ID number) and Valid until with month and year. If a qualification has expired, its box is shown in red with a warning sign; if it expires within the next three months, it is shown in bold. On a computer, hovering over a box shows the level, or the certificate and date.

Desktop: your own profile via your name or PROFILE; other people's profiles under PEOPLE > name.

Mobile: EDIT PROFILE – your own profile only.

App platform: in the Edit profile window – separately for each logged-in account.

You see and maintain your own entries yourself. Other people's entries can be seen and changed by Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement – by Tourmanagement not if the Tourmanagement is not allowed to invite or edit people box is ticked under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS. What you enter in your own profile applies on all platforms where you work with the same email address. The search under PEOPLE also finds people by language and qualification – “Spanish” also finds “Español”.

Frequent Flyer Programs: Use the + next to Frequent Flyer Number to add a program: pick the airline under Select program, type in the number, done. If your airline is not on the list, choose Other program and write the name yourself. More programs adds more — one person can have as many as they like. Every entry is saved right away; you do not have to submit the profile for it.

Logged-in devices: Further down in your profile you can see which devices you are currently logged in on — with a readable name such as “Android · ELP-NX9 (App)”. The device you are sitting at is marked this device and deliberately has no logout button, so you cannot lock yourself out by accident. Every other line can be logged out — handy when you have sold or lost a phone. One line stands for a device, not for a single login: Logins: 3 means you logged in there three times — and logging out ends all three at once. If you are sitting at a recognised device, log out all others clears every other device in one step.

Rail discount cards have their own list in the profile: each entry has a Name of the card and a Card number. Both are free text, and you can add as many entries as you like — a discount card and a bonus programme side by side, plus the cards of other rail companies when you tour across Europe. Before, there was a single field with no room for a card number, so bonus numbers ended up among the frequent flyer programmes.

Alongside phone number and birthday, two more entries can be switched on as required fields: Place of Residence and clothing size (Shirt). Your platform administration decides this; for you it means your profile only counts as complete once those fields are filled in too.

First name and email are always required and cannot be switched off.

Two-factor login

After your password, J.SHOW asks for a six-digit code from an authenticator app on your phone. Knowing your password alone is no longer enough to get in.

Setting it up: You will find Two-factor login in your profile, just below your logged-in devices. On the artist platform you will find it on a computer just as on a phone — on the phone via Edit profile and the Two-factor login button there. On the agency platform it sits under SETTINGS, and in the app at the bottom of the Edit profile window, separately for each logged-in account. Click set up and enter your password. Then scan the code shown with an authenticator app, or type the key in by hand — Copy key puts it on the clipboard. To finish, enter the code the app is showing right now.

The code belongs to you, not to a platform. You set it up once and use it everywhere you work with the same email address. Your authenticator app therefore holds a single entry, not one per platform.

Where the code is asked for: when logging in to the artist platform, the agency platform and the app — on a computer as well as on a phone. Setting it up works everywhere too — on a computer, on a phone and in the app.

Stay logged in: if you ticked that when logging in, J.SHOW will not ask for the code on that device every time. Anyone who has not set up two-factor login yet is still taken through the setup — even with a valid tick.

Turning it off: via turn off, with your password and a valid code. The code is required — otherwise someone who only has your password could simply switch the protection off. It is turned off on every platform where you work with this address.

Lost or changed your phone? Then you cannot get any further on your own — talk to your platform administration. Admin and agency users can turn two-factor login off in that person’s crew form via Turn off two-factor login. A window opens in which the admin enters their own password — otherwise anyone sitting down at an unlocked computer for a moment could switch off other people's protection. Afterwards you set it up again with the new phone.

For admins — making it mandatory: Under SETTINGS > PLATFORM you will find the switch Required on this platform. It takes effect from the next login; anyone without an authenticator app linked yet is guided through the setup. Two limits go with it:

As long as the platform requires two-factor login, nobody can turn it off just for themselves.

Do not rely on “computer only”. Whether a login comes from a phone is something the browser states itself — and that can be faked. The tick is a convenience for your people, not a barrier against an attacker.

Agency platform with single sign-on: If the agency platform hands its login over to Single sign-on (SSO), the switch is replaced by Handled by single sign-on. Anyone coming in through the login service has already identified themselves there — J.SHOW does not ask for a second factor on top.

Applies only to logging in to this agency platform. Artist platforms ask for a code only if their own settings require one — nothing is switched on there from here. The code itself belongs to the person, though: set it up here and you will also be asked for it on every artist platform you log in to directly. Jumping into an artist platform from here does not trigger a second prompt.

Joining Multiple Platforms with One Email

If you're invited to multiple Artist Platforms using the same email address:

You’ll need to accept each invitation individually by clicking JOIN NOW in every invite email.
If you use the same email address, your existing Profile will automatically be reused — there’s no need to create a new password.
Most of your Profile information will stay unified across Platforms, including your name, contact details, language settings, languages spoken and qualifications, driver’s license info, and clothing sizes.

However, the following settings are Platform-specific:

In the J.SHOW App:

Go to the ALL EVENTS tab to view all Events across all Platforms you're registered on, sorted by date. They are not grouped by Platform — whenever the Platform changes, its logo appears above the following Events.
If the Crewbooking tool is activated, you can mark your availability for upcoming Events.
Once you’ve been booked for specific Events, they will appear in the MY EVENTS tab.

Note: There is no limit to how many Platforms you can be invited to using the same email address.

Using Multiple Email Addresses

If you're invited to different Platforms using different email addresses: You can still consolidate all your Platforms inside the J.SHOW App (or app.j.show.):

Go to the menu and click ADD ANOTHER ACCOUNT.
Log in using your other email address and password.
All Events from all connected email accounts will now appear in the ALL EVENTS tab, sorted by date across all Platforms. Whenever the Platform changes, its logo appears above the following Events.

Note: You can combine up to three email addresses in a single App view.

Important: Each email address has its own Profile — these remain separate, even if Events from multiple accounts are visible together in the App.
You’ll need to update contact details, driver’s license info, or language preferences individually for each Profile.

To edit your Profile inside the App, first select the Platform whose Profile you want to update.

Then click on your name or on PROFILE at the bottom of the screen, and make the desired changes. Save with the check mark at the top right; the X at the top left closes the window. The windows for frequent flyer programmes, rail discounts, languages spoken and qualifications that you open from the profile work the same way.

Turning two accounts into one for good: Instead of only showing two addresses side by side, you can also merge them. To do so, change your email address in your Profile to the other one (pencil after the address, 'Change email address', see Editing Your Profile), choose the Platforms and confirm with the code we send to the other address. The email with the code tells you explicitly that this turns both accounts into one. After that, you log in everywhere with the other address.

The two Profiles become one: the more complete one applies, and empty fields are filled in from the other. 'Hide contact information for Crew / Guest' stays on if it was on in either Profile; you only appear in the global crew register if you had allowed it in both. If the other address already had two-factor login or a universal calendar link, those apply. If the other address already belongs to another Profile on one of the chosen Platforms, the change is not possible — you then see "This email address is already used for another account."

Multiple Accounts

Some people work with more than one email address – one through the agency, a private one, one for a side project. You can be logged in to up to three accounts side by side. The notification hub and the global search then gather across all of them.

In the App: add another account in the menu.
On the Artist Platform: open PEOPLE, click on yourself, then add another account.
On the agency platform: open SETTINGS — the same box is there.

In both cases you enter the email address and password of the other account – it is the same action and the same list. The password is the proof; there is no confirmation email. That way nobody can attach someone else's address to their own account.

This applies to this device for as long as you stay logged in. It is not a permanent link between addresses: log an account out and it is immediately gone everywhere. On another device you log in again.

This does not change your permissions. It only merges the overview. On every Platform you still see exactly what your Profile there allows – and that is checked afresh with every request.

On top of that, your own accounts count as the same person in Crew Booking – so a double booking is spotted even if you use different addresses on the two Platforms.

To log an account out again, use logout in the same place – no password needed. It is then logged out everywhere on this device, and the notification hub no longer shows anything from it.

Deleting Your Profile

If you want to delete your Profile or remove a Platform from your App:

Login to the Platform you want to remove (in the App: first select the Platform you wish to remove).

Click on PROFILE at the bottom of the screen.
The ‘Edit Profile’ window will appear.

Click on DELETE PROFILE.
A warning will appear, reminding you that all associated data on this Platform will be deleted and that you will no longer have access to it.

Click YES to confirm and remove this Platform from your account.
The Platform will no longer be listed in your App.

Important: Deleting your Profile in one Platform does not affect your Profiles in any other Platforms.
Each Artist or Agency Platform manages its own Profile access — so you will remain active on other Platforms unless you delete those individually as well.

The Agency Platform

The Agency Platform is your central hub for managing multiple Artist Platforms, coordinating employees, tracking presales across all artists, and handling agency-level finances and settings.

It is available for desktop browsers only.

Logging In

Access your Agency Platform by navigating to your custom subdomain (e.g. youragency.j.show).

You can log in using:

Note: Employee accounts can only log in through the Agency Platform — not directly via an Artist Platform.

The login is a page of its own: your agency's logo at the top, below it Email, Password and LOGIN. Under Artist platforms the agency's artist platforms appear as tiles. They open the login of that artist platform and are only meant for accounts created directly there. As an employee you always log in at the top, including when you want to reset your password. If your agency uses single sign-on, only the LOGIN button is shown at the top.

If you forgot your password, click Forgot password on the login screen. You'll receive an email with a reset link. It is valid for 30 minutes and works only once — if it has expired, simply request a new one.

Navigation

Once logged in, the top navigation bar provides access to all core areas of the Agency Platform:

In the bar at the bottom, What's new opens the latest changes. At the top of that window you can turn your newsletter on or off.

Platform Switcher

Use the Select platform dropdown in the navigation to switch between Artist Platforms assigned to you.

Platforms not assigned to you: Below the platforms assigned to you, the dropdown lists the agency’s other Artist Platforms as a separate group. As an admin you find them under Not assigned to you: one click asks for confirmation, assigns the platform to you and opens it. Employees without admin rights see them under No access – request: choose a platform, add a Message to the admins (optional) if you like and click Send request. The admins receive the request by email, and the platform is then marked (requested) in the dropdown. The info icon next to the dropdown explains which platforms you can see.

Admins find pending requests under EMPLOYEES in the Pending access requests box; their number is shown on the tab. Choose the Permission and click Approve or Decline – the person gets an email either way. If no platform has been assigned to you at all, the overview shows a note with the admins’ addresses and a Request access button.

When you select a specific Artist Platform, the main view will load that platform — allowing you to work directly within it from the Agency interface.

After you pick a platform, the dropdown shows Select platform again. To return to the Agency overview showing all platforms, click ALL EVENTS in the navigation bar.

Presale by Promoter

If any of your Artist Platforms have PRO features enabled, you'll see a presale by promoter dropdown in the navigation.

Choose a promoter there to see only their Events — across all Artist Platforms. The menu also offers presale not yet entered (only Events whose sales figures are still missing) and All (potentially long loading time).

The view is where you enter the presale figures. For each Event you see:

At the top, UPCOMING EVENTS and PAST EVENTS switch between upcoming and past Events. ONLY EMPTY hides Events whose figures have already been entered, and EXPORT PRESALE opens the export sets.

Shared Databases

One of the key advantages of the Agency Platform is that all Artist Platforms share centralized databases for Venues, Partners, and Accommodations.

When you add a Venue, Partner, or Accommodation in one platform, it becomes available across all Artist Platforms connected to the same Agency — eliminating duplicate entries and ensuring consistency.

To manage these databases, use the VENUES, PARTNERS, and ACCOMMODATIONS tabs in the top navigation. From there you can add, edit, export, and delete entries.

On the Agency Platform, too, every accommodation has one or more types, and “Type:” above the list filters by them. The ACCOMMODATIONS and PARTNERS lists also offer the radius search.

Employee Access and Platform Permissions

Logging into the Agency Platform

The Agency Platform is accessed by logging in via your custom subdomain.
You can log in using the initial email address used to create the Platform or with an employee account.

Note: Employee accounts can only log in through the Agency Platform — not directly via an Artist Platform.

Inviting New Employees

To invite an Employee to your Agency Platform and assign them access to specific Artist Platforms:

Login to Agency Platform.

Select EMPLOYEES from the top navigation.
You will see a list of all current employees.

Click the icon in the ‘Employees’ box.

Enter their email address, check if they should have ADMIN rights, and select the Artist Platforms they should have access to.

Click SEND — they will receive an email invitation to join.

The link in the invitation is valid for 30 days and can be used only once – the employee uses it to set their password (“Please set a password”). If it has expired or was already used, the page shows “This link has either already been used or has expired”. An invitation cannot be re-sent: delete the entry via > DELETE EMPLOYEE and invite the address again.

Who is considered an ‘Employee’?
Anyone who works for the Agency but is not part of the Touring Production Team of Artists.

Managing Employees and Their Access

The EMPLOYEES tab is only visible to the Agency Platform Owner and any Employee with Admin Rights.

Inside the EMPLOYEES tab, you’ll see a list of all Employees associated with the Agency.
By clicking next to a name, you can:

Employee Admin Permissions

Employees with Admin Rights on the Agency Platform can also:

Platform Assignment (Bulk)

The PLATFORM ASSIGNMENT button on the Employees page opens an overview of all platforms with the number of assigned employees. For each platform, an editing page with all employees and toggle checkboxes allows quick assignment.

This feature is only visible to the Owner and Employees with Admin Rights.

Accessing Artist Platforms

Employees can only access Artist Platforms they’ve been explicitly assigned to.

By default, this grants them Admin Rights on those Platforms — unless they already have a registered Profile with different permissions.

The permission is chosen per artist platform, not once for the whole agency — the field is called Permission. The same person can therefore have full access on one platform and a restricted one on another, where the contract stays hidden, for instance.

For one person you decide per platform: Choose for each platform which permission this person works with there.

From within a platform you decide per person: Choose for each person which permission they work with on this platform.

Note: Without an explicit choice, full access applies — an empty setting restricts nothing.

Access through an invitation: If an address that has an employee account with the agency is invited on one of the agency's Artist Platforms, that employee account is assigned the platform – with the permission chosen in the invitation. If the person inviting belongs to the agency themselves (owner or employee account), this happens right away when they invite. If someone else invites, for instance Tourmanagement without an agency login, the assignment only comes once the invited person accepts the invitation; a declined or expired invitation leaves none behind.

An existing assignment stays unchanged, including its permission. An open access request from the person for this platform is thereby settled.

If the Employee Also Has a Profile

If the same email address is used to also create a personal Profile on an Artist Platform:

In short: A Profile determines what the employee can see and do on an Artist Platform.

Navigating Between Platforms

Once logged in, Employees can:

Resetting Employee Passwords

Forgot your password? Use Forgot password at login. After entering your email, you’ll receive a reset link.

Event List & Archive

The Agency Platform provides a consolidated view of all Events across all your Artist Platforms, as well as an archive for past or deactivated platforms.

Custom event types are often named identically across several Artist Platforms but carry their own numbers there. In the All Events overview the filter therefore bundles identically named event types into one entry instead of listing them per platform.

Combined Event List

The ALL EVENTS tab shows all Events from all Artist Platforms in a single, scrollable list.

The list loads dynamically as you scroll — displaying 50 Events at a time for fast performance even with thousands of Events.

Columns & Information

For each Event, the list displays:

For Artist Platforms with PRO features, additional columns appear:

Status Indicators

Filtering & Sorting

To filter the Event List:

Use the search field to filter by keyword (searches across date, title, venue, city, country, and partner).

Use the Artist filter to narrow the list to a specific Artist Platform. Your selection is remembered.

Toggle between Upcoming and Past Events.

Use the Only Due filter to show only Events with overdue contract or settlement deadlines.

Use the Event Type filter to narrow the list to specific event types (e.g. shows only, rehearsals only, etc.).

Use the Contract Status and Settlement Status dropdown filters to filter Events by their current contract or settlement state. These filters are automatically hidden for event types that are not shows.

To sort the list:

Click on column headers to sort by Date, Platform, Title, or Venue.

Grand Total

A grand total of all displayed Events is shown at the bottom of the list.

To open an Event, click on it in the list. The Artist Platform will load with that Event's details.

CSV Export of the Overall List

Use the EXPORT button of the overall list to download all displayed events as CSV. The export respects the active filters and contains the columns Date, Artist, Title, City, Venue and Partner; for PRO platforms it adds the PRO columns Contract Status, Presale capacity, Tickets Sold, Utilization, Forecast and Settlement status.

Note: Events from non-PRO platforms appear in the export as well — the PRO columns remain empty there.

The due only filter now also takes overdue tasks into account, alongside contract and settlement status: an event therefore also shows up when it carries a to-do whose deadline has passed.

Archive

The ARCHIVE tab provides access to archived Artist Platforms — for artists or bands that are no longer active. Admins see all of the agency's archives; employees without admin rights only see the archives they have access to – automatically for platforms they were assigned to, otherwise when an admin shares them (see Access for employees).

The archive displays a table of all archived platforms with:

Viewing Archived Data

To browse Events within an archive:

Click on an archived platform to open it.

Use the year filter to navigate between different years.

Click on individual Events to view their full details (read-only).

In an event's archive view, switch between the tabs OVERVIEW, CREW, GUEST LIST, VEHICLES, CONTRACT, and FILES.

Files tab: If file uploads were preserved during archiving, the FILES tab shows them grouped by source and category (e.g. event files per category, contract files, venue, communication, finance) — files of travel party members appear by name as a separate group per person.

Restoring a Platform

An archived platform can be recreated from its archive snapshot:

Click Restore in the row of the archived platform and follow the assistant. The platform is restored as an active artist platform with the data from the snapshot.

Exporting Archived Data

You can export archived event data as XLSX (Excel) or CSV files. The Excel export produces a curated workbook with two sheets:

Sheet names, column headers and status values appear in the language you have set in J.SHOW.

Starting the Excel export:

In the archive list: Click Excel Export on the respective row.

In the archive detail view: Optionally pick a year via the year filter and then click Excel Export — the current year filter is carried over.

Note: For data protection reasons, sensitive personal data (such as crew contact data, allergies, dietary preferences, clothing sizes, birth dates and personal documents) is automatically excluded from archive exports. The column whitelist is hard-coded in the exporter so that future schema additions cannot accidentally leak new personal data.

Export with your own choice of columns: Export CSV in the event overview opens a window with From/To and 40 columns you can switch off, grouped by event, venue, partner, deal and presale — among them the addresses of venue and partner, the postcode as its own column and the capacity from the library. Your browser remembers the selection. If you pick nothing, you get exactly the export as before; the date in it is now four-digit and without the weekday so that Excel recognises it as a date — the weekday can be added as a column of its own.

Access for employees

Employees without admin rights only see the ARCHIVE tab if they may open at least one archive — and in it, only those archives. When a platform is archived, everyone assigned to it automatically gets access to the archive; for anyone else, an admin shares the archive.

To share an archive (Admin only):

In the archive's row, click Access for employees (N). The number in brackets tells you how many people can open the archive.

In the section that opens, tick the employees who should see the archive — the change is saved straight away. Admins are listed as permanently ticked, since they see all archives anyway.

Employees with access can open the archive, view its shows and files and export the data. Only admins can restore a platform.

Access granted by hand applies to the archive that existed when the box was ticked. If the same platform is archived again later and the person isn’t assigned to it at that point, the box is empty for the new archive — tick it again if the person should also see this version.

Agency Financial Overview

The FINANCES tab provides a centralized view of all financial activity across your PRO Artist Platforms. It is only available if at least one of your Artist Platforms has PRO features enabled.

Invoice Management

The INVOICES section gives you a complete overview of all invoices generated across your Artist Platforms.

Which invoices you see here depends on your Permission per artist platform (see Employee Access): a platform's invoices only appear in the list if you are Admin or Agency there. Free invoices of the agency itself are only visible to the owner and to employees with admin rights. The same applies to the bulk export.

Invoice Status Tracking

Each invoice has a status that can be tracked and updated:

Billing Entity Badges

When multiple Billing Entities are configured, the invoice list displays colored badges next to each invoice — so you can see at a glance which company issued the invoice.

Payment Tracking

Invoices with multiple payment installments (payment terms) show the earliest due date and the number of installments in the list. Payment receipt can be recorded individually per installment.

When all installments are paid, the invoice status is automatically set to "Fully paid". For partial payments, the status changes to "Partly paid".

Overdue payment terms are highlighted in red.

Filtering Invoices

Filter by Platform, Status, Numbering source, or Date Range.

Multiple status filters can be selected simultaneously.

Standalone Invoices

Via FINANCES > INVOICES > + Create Invoice, you can also create Standalone Invoices — invoices not tied to a specific Event. In the Agency, the agency is automatically used as the billing entity. The tax rates available per item are those from the “Standard tax rate” box in the agency settings (at fee and invoice and at the ticket price) plus 0%.

Standalone Invoices appear in the central invoice list alongside all other invoices. For details, see Standalone Invoices.

Bulk Invoice Export (ZIP)

To download all invoices from a given period in a single ZIP archive, use the Export button next to + Create Invoice at the top of the invoice list.

In the export window, set the filters:

Two download buttons are available:

As XRechnung (ZIP) — one XML file per invoice, only available on platforms based in Germany.

As PDF (ZIP) — one PDF per invoice, available on all platforms.

The export runs in the background with a live progress bar — even large periods no longer time out. When the build finishes, the ZIP download starts automatically.

Financial Data Export

The Data Export section lets you generate detailed Excel (XLSX) financial reports across all or individual Artist Platforms.

Configuring an Export

Select which Platform(s) to include (all or a specific one).

Choose a date range — or use one of the preset options: Last Year, Last Quarter, Last Month, or This Year.

Optionally enable subtotals by settlement package for grouped breakdowns.

The checkbox Static values, no formulas (faster export) is on by default. Formulas are evaluated once and stored as static values, so Excel opens and saves the workbook much faster. Uncheck it to receive the classic formula-based workbook (significantly slower for large reports).

Export Contents

The exported Excel workbook contains the following sheets:

Data is grouped by Settlement Package (Tour) for each Artist Platform.

The Expenses (actual) and Expenses (planned) sheets have a Cost type column at the very end. Expenses marked as internal costs are borne entirely by the agency — the Paid by column then reads Agency. For Recharged to artist it reads Artist, even if the agency otherwise covers the costs of the category.

DATEV Export

Availability: The DATEV integration is only active for platforms based in Germany.

If DATEV is activated in your Agency Settings, a dedicated DATEV Export tab appears in the Finance section.

This generates CSV files compatible with DATEV accounting software — the standard for tax consultants and accountants in Germany.

The export includes invoice amounts, payment data, settlement dates, and proper account mappings based on your DATEV configuration.

When multiple Billing Entities are configured, the export can be filtered by individual billing entities.

The booking text contains the invoice recipient (company name) followed by the show name, separated by " | ". With a maximum length of 60 characters, the recipient name takes priority — the show name is truncated if necessary. This format applies to regular invoices, advance invoices, and commission/expense invoices.

Note: DATEV must first be configured under SETTINGS > DATEV. When using multiple billing entities, the DATEV configuration (chart of accounts, client number, account mappings) can be set up individually per billing entity. See DATEV Settings for setup details.

Presale Overview

The Presale by promoter view (accessible from the navigation dropdown) lets you monitor ticket presale performance across all PRO Artist Platforms, filtered by promoter/organizer.

The view also shows events that are not announced yet — so you can already enter figures there. Such events are marked with their status in the rem. weeks line (not public or tba). They are missing from the presale report until they are announced – unless the Show in presales overview anyway box is ticked on the event on the Artist Platform (see presale list). Then the event appears in the presale report, and the marker in the rem. weeks line is dropped.

For each Event, you can track:

You can toggle between upcoming and past Events, and search by keyword.

Note: As in the full event list, a colored dot indicates the event's planning status (yellow = open, orange = in preparation, green = prepared; completed events have no dot).

Agency Settings

The SETTINGS tab contains all configuration options for your Agency Platform. Settings are organized into several sections accessible via tabs on the left side.

General Settings

License Information

The License box shows your current subscription details:

Payment Methods

Manage your payment methods via the integrated Stripe payment system:

Click + ADD PAYMENT METHOD to add a new credit card or payment method.

Set a default payment method for automatic subscription renewals.

Remove outdated payment methods as needed.

Email Address

Change the Agency owner's email address. A verification link will be sent to the new address before the change takes effect.

Time zone

Under Time zone you choose the time zone the agency uses for times in emails, PDFs and automated tasks. Without a selection, Europe/Berlin applies. On screen, saved times — for example when an invoice was sent — appear in the time zone of the device you are working on.

Number Format

Choose the preferred number format for all numbers and amounts on the Agency Platform:

Default Currency

In the Global box, set the default currency under Currency for the agency and all linked artist platforms. The default is EUR for EU regions and USD for international and Asian platforms.

Artist platforms automatically inherit the agency currency unless a custom currency is set on the respective artist platform.

CSV format

Choose the separator for every CSV export on the platform (events, venues, partners, accommodations, contact persons):

Every export also includes a UTF-8 BOM so Excel displays accented characters and special symbols correctly out of the box — no manual import wizard needed.

State in the event list

The View state in events list checkbox in the Global box controls whether the state abbreviation appears between the country code and the city in the combined event list — e.g. “DE, SN, Leipzig” instead of “DE, Leipzig”. The same applies to the CSV export of the combined list. Artist platforms have their own checkbox for this in their settings.

Referral Program

Under SETTINGS > GENERAL, you'll find your personal referral code. Share the code or the referral link with other agencies or artists — if they create a J.SHOW platform and enter your code during registration, you both receive a free license extension.

The referral link appears below the code. Click the icon next to it to copy it to your clipboard.

Under Your referrals, every platform you referred is listed with its status in brackets:

If an artist runs under your Agency, their referrals appear here as well — noting which artist they came through. The license extension applies to the Agency including every artist under it; that is why the Artist Platform itself does not show this section.

Region

A country preset sets date format, time format, number format and currency all at once — the same choice as on the artist platform. The setting now applies throughout: in the archive, in invoices and finances, in the DATEV statistics, in the global search and on the settings pages.

Display & Branding

Customize the visual appearance of your Agency Platform.

Logo

Upload a PNG logo with a transparent background (max 500kB, min 600px wide).

Choose how your logo behaves in Dark Mode:

Custom Font

Upload a custom font file (.ttf, .otf, .woff, or .woff2) to replace the default headline font.

The font will also be applied to exported PDF documents.

Color Scheme

In the 'Color Preset' box you set accent colors, text colors, and background colors directly — separately for light and dark. There is no choice between ready-made color schemes here; an empty field uses the default color.

The 'Color preview' next to it shows every change instantly. Use Contrast check to test the readability of all color combinations.

Headline Font Size

Choose between Default, Larger, or Smaller to adjust the headline font size.

Uppercase Headlines

Enable or disable uppercase formatting for headlines.

Apply Fonts / Colors to All Platforms

Click Apply fonts / colors to all platforms to apply the current color scheme, font size, uppercase setting, and font files to all your Artist Platforms.

Note: When creating new Artist Platforms, the agency's font and color settings are automatically applied.

File Naming

Customize the naming conventions for all exported documents. This ensures that all PDFs and spreadsheets follow your agency's naming standards.

Configurable file names include:

Contract Settings PRO

Configure default contract document templates, including header/footer content, which fields to display, custom field labels, and default payment/cancellation terms.

These settings serve as defaults for all Artist Platforms — individual platforms can override them if needed.

Multilingual Contract Labels

Under "Labels in the contract", you can configure the following contract texts in all supported languages:

The appropriate language version is automatically used when a contract is generated in that language.

Invoice Settings PRO

Configure default invoice templates, including:

DATEV Integration

Availability: The DATEV integration is only active for platforms based in Germany.

Connect your Agency Platform to DATEV accounting software for seamless financial data transfer.

Enabling DATEV

Go to SETTINGS > DATEV.

Check Enable DATEV export.

Configuration

Once activated, configure the following fields:

Account mapping

Map your revenue and expense categories to the correct DATEV accounts:

Commission and expense invoices are automatically posted to the correct accounts based on the respective tax category.

DocuSign Integration

Connect your Agency Platform to DocuSign for digital contract signatures.

Go to SETTINGS > INTEGRATIONS > DOCUSIGN (the same submenu also holds Box Sign).

Click CONNECT TO DOCUSIGN to initiate the OAuth2 connection.

Log in to your DocuSign account and authorize J.SHOW.

Once connected, you'll see the connected account's email and the connection timestamp. To disconnect, click DISCONNECT.

Each Agency Platform can have its own DocuSign account. The connection is shared with all linked Artist Platforms unless overridden at the platform level.

Signing Order (Default)

Once DocuSign is connected, the Signing Order box lets you set the default signing order for all contracts sent from your agency:

This setting acts as a default for all linked Artist Platforms — it can be changed for each contract when sending. Artist Platforms can also override the agency default in their own settings.

Cover Message (Default)

In the Cover message box you store a text that appears in every email in which DocuSign sends a contract for signature. It applies to all artists without a cover message of their own and appears prefilled in the Message to recipients field of the send window, where it can be adjusted for every dispatch. Placeholders as in the Deal Memo (e.g. {artist}, {showdate}, {venue}) are replaced with the event's details. The box appears once DocuSign is connected.

Data Import

If your agency is switching over from other software, you don't have to retype anything. Support takes over your existing data in one step – for the agency and for each of your artists.

What Gets Imported

Support takes over as many contact details and contact persons as possible, for the venues too.

How the Import Works

Export all the data your previous software provides – for the agency and for each artist. You don't need to rework the files; ideally as a CSV, but any other format is fine too.

Send the files to support@j.show. Support clarifies with you what can be taken over and then carries out the import. There is no button for this in the platform itself.

Anything that is already in your data is not created a second time: J.SHOW recognizes venues and accommodations by name and city, partners by name. The events are linked to the existing entries.

Website Integration

Generate an embeddable JavaScript snippet to display tour dates on your agency's website. The dates update automatically in real-time.

Go to SETTINGS > EVENT LIST FOR WEBSITE.

Copy the provided JavaScript and HTML code.

Paste it into your website where you want the dates to appear.

The embed code can be customized with CSS to match your website's styling.

Data protection: On the same page, the 'Data protection' section describes what the embedded event list does technically when someone opens your website — no cookies, nothing stored in your visitors' browsers, only the details of every page request, servers in Germany. Below it you find the 'Template for your privacy policy' with your agency address already filled in; click into the text field to select the whole text and add it to your website's privacy policy. Details as for the Artist platform.

Note: These notes describe what the event list does technically — they are not legal advice.

Ticket Link Parameters

Optionally, URL parameters can be configured for up to 3 ticket links. These parameters are automatically appended to all generated ticket link URLs — useful for tracking parameters, affiliate codes, or campaign identifiers.

Go to SETTINGS > find the Website Interface section > Ticket Link Parameters.

The Basics

Whether an event is “over” is measured by J.SHOW in the venue's time zone, not in your device's. An event in Tokyo therefore only drops out of the list once the show day plus three hours has passed there — from 03:00 local time. That way access to accommodation, schedule and travel details does not break off in the middle of the night while people are still working after the show.

Accessing the Artist Platform

Inviting People to join the Artist Platforms
i.e. Creating Personal Profiles on Artist Platforms

Anyone who is part of the Touring Production Team — or needs access to the J.SHOW App — must be personally invited to join the Artist Platform and create a Profile.
This includes Agency Employees.

How to Invite Someone

Log in to the Artist Platform, or log in to the Agency Platform and select the desired Artist Platform.

Navigate to PEOPLE > +ADD NEW PERSON.
The 'Invite Person' window will appear.

Enter their Name, Email Address, preferred Language, their Function and Access Rights, and check to activate the Crewbooking tool if needed.

Add from the agency: If the platform belongs to an agency and you work there as the owner or with an employee account, the Add from the agency search field appears at the top of the Invite person window. Type in a name or an email address and pick the person from the list – first name, last name, email address, language and function are then filled in. Check the details, choose the Access Rights and send the invitation as usual.

You are offered the people you see in the agency under PEOPLE – together with the platforms they are already on. Anyone who is already on this platform or has already been invited is not on the list. A function that was only created on the other platform stays empty.

Mobile: PEOPLE > Invite person – the search field sits above the form there.

Note: If a specific Function is missing from the dropdown, go to SETTINGS > PEOPLE > FUNCTIONS and enable it there. You can also create your own functions: each category (Performers, Management, Technical, Driver, Others) has an add icon next to its title — click it, name the function, and it becomes available in the dropdown. Use the edit icon next to a custom function to rename or delete it.

Click SEND to issue the invitation, or choose SAVE AND SEND LATER if you want to send it later.

Delayed Invitations

If you chose SAVE AND SEND LATER, you can send all pending invitations at once by clicking SEND ALL INVITATIONS WHICH HAVE NOT YET BEEN SENT at the bottom of the people list under PEOPLE > OVERVIEW.
This is helpful if you prefer to finish setting up — such as assigning Travel Parties or adding Event info — before notifying team members.

What Happens Next

The invited person will receive an email invitation to register on the Artist Platform and create their personal Profile.
Once registered, they can login via browser and/or use the J.SHOW App.

Note: Even after sending the invitation — and before the person registers — you can still update their Access Rights and Function under PEOPLE > OVERVIEW.

Note: You can invite someone without sending the official system-generated email.
As soon as a person is added — whether the invitation has been sent, saved for later, or not yet accepted — you can still open their 'Invitation' form by clicking on their name in the system, and manually copy the registration link at the bottom of the window.

Managing People on the Platform

To edit someone else's Profile (as Admin, Agency, or TM with permission):

Go to PEOPLE > click on the person’s name > the Edit Person window will appear > make the necessary changes > click SAVE to finish.

To edit your own Profile:

Click on your name or select PROFILE at the bottom of the Platform > the Edit Person window will appear > make changes > click SAVE to finish.

Several functions per person: The Edit Person window starts with one Function field. Use + Secondary function to add more — up to five in total. The at the end of a row removes an additional function again; click SAVE to store it.

In an event's travel party, for such people you pick from all functions in their profile in the Function and 2nd Function columns. Per event, a person still holds at most two functions. Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement can make this choice — tour managers if they are in the travel party themselves or may edit all events.

In the people list under PEOPLE, the column is now called Additional functions and lists all further functions of a person, separated by commas. On mobile they are listed below each other on the entry.

Note: Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement can change a person's functions.

To temporarily remove someone’s access without deleting their Profile:

Go to their entry under PEOPLE, open their Profile, and click DEACTIVATE PERSON.
They will no longer have access to the Platform but can be reactivated at any time.

Note: You can’t change someone’s Name or Email Address — only they can update that information themselves.

Note: You can only edit other people's Profiles via the desktop version. However, you can edit your own Profile in the App.

Need a spreadsheet of all Team Members?

Export and print a spreadsheet of everyone listed in the Artist Platform by going to PEOPLE > EXPORT.

Which events is a person booked on?

Go to PEOPLE > BOOKING LIST. The list shows every person with the number of their upcoming and all bookings; search by first or last name at the top.

Click a person to see every event they are booked on – with Date, Show name, Venue, City and Status. The Upcoming, Past and All buttons pick the period; the number behind each one tells you how many events there are. Passive bookings are marked (Passive), canceled events are struck through. Click a row to open the event; back to the booking list takes you back to the list of people.

Shortcuts: In a person's window, Show all bookings (N) sits on the right of the use crewbooking tool row. And in the global search, a person hit shows the line Show all bookings (N) below the next three events when that person is booked on more events – on the Agency Platform too; it leads to the booking list of the Artist Platform.

Note: The booking list is available to Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement when Tourmanagement may edit all events is ticked under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS. It is part of the desktop version.

An invitation is valid for 30 days — the deadline counts from sending, not from creating. After that only the link dies at first: the person stays in the list and can be revived with a fresh link via send invitation again. Only a further 180 days later are name, address and assignments removed. Declined invitations skip this grace period.

Typo in the address? As long as an invitation hasn’t been accepted, the invited person’s window under PEOPLE shows the email address as a field. Enter the correct address and click change address. If the invitation has already been sent, the button reads change address and invite again: the new address receives a new invitation right away, and the link in the email to the previous address stops working. Assignments such as travel parties, to-dos and vehicles are kept. On mobile, the field is in the expanded entry under PEOPLE. Admin, Agency and Tour management can change it – Tour management not if Tourmanagement is not allowed to invite or edit people is ticked under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS.

How to Join an Artist or Agency Platform as an Invitee

Once you’ve been invited to an Artist or Agency Platform, you will receive an email invitation to register.

Open the email invitation.

Click on Join Now.

Choose a password.

Log in to your Platform.

Important: Even if you already have a Profile on one Artist Platform, you must register separately for each additional Artist Platform you’re invited to.
Simply click JOIN NOW in the invitation email, then click REGISTER in the form that opens.
If you use the same email, your Profile details will carry over automatically.

How to Access the Artist Platform

There are several ways to log into your Artist Platform:

➀ Via Direct Link

You’ll receive a personal invitation email containing a direct URL to the Artist Platform you’ve been invited to. Simply follow the link to register or log in.

➁ Via the J.SHOW App

Use the J.SHOW mobile app (iOS or Android) to access your Artist Platform on the go.

➂ Via the Browser App

You can also log in anytime via the web app: app.j.show
This gives you access to your personal App Overview — showing all Artist Platforms you are connected to, whether via browser or app.

Switching Between Multiple Accounts

Both in the mobile app and the browser version at app.j.show, you can stay logged in with up to three (3) different email addresses at the same time. Select “add another account” to log in with additional email addresses.

Language Settings

The language displayed in J.SHOW depends on the Platform type and default language, your personal Profile settings, and your device or browser language.

Agency Platform

The Agency Platform interface language will always match your browser language and cannot be changed manually.

Artist Platform

For Artist Platforms, the interface language follows your personal Profile Language setting.
You can update it anytime under PROFILE > Language.

If you're invited to an Artist Platform and haven't yet personalized your Profile, the interface language will default to the one selected by the Platform Admin at the time of invitation.

For Employees: If you access an Artist Platform without a personal Profile, the interface language will automatically follow the global default language — not the browser language.

Global Language Settings

The Global Language of an Artist Platform is defined by the Admin under SETTINGS > PLATFORM > ‘Global’ box.
This setting determines the default interface language for:

Language in the App

Logo and Layout

Before you dive into creating Events and Tour Plans, take a moment to personalize your space on J.SHOW.
Whether you're managing a Band or building a Brand, setting up your visuals properly helps create a sense of Home, clarity, and professionalism from the start.

With just a few adjustments, you can transform your Platform from a blank slate into a fully branded backstage HQ.

Let's go!

Uploading Your Logo

Before uploading, decide how your logo should behave across Light and Dark Mode:

To upload your Platform Logo:

Go to SETTINGS > LAYOUT.

In the 'Logo Upload' box, select a *.png file (max 500kB, min 600px wide) with a transparent background.
The logo auto-resizes to fit the header — crop tightly for best results.

Choose one of the three inversion options above.

Click UPLOAD. Your logo will appear at the top of the platform.

Creating a logo from text

No image of your own? Then go to SETTINGS > LAYOUT, type your name into the Lettering field and click create. The wording is used exactly as you write it — capitals, lower case and special characters included. Until now the logo was only created once, when the platform was set up, and always in capitals.

Custom Fonts

To change Fonts for headlines:

Go to SETTINGS > LAYOUT.

In the 'Font for Headlines' box, upload a font file (.ttf, .otf, .woff, or .woff2) to replace the default font.
You may upload a separate bold version if required.

Check 'Headlines Uppercase' to display headlines in all caps.

Customizing the Color Scheme

To customize the color scheme of the software:

Go to SETTINGS > LAYOUT.

In the 'Colors' box, choose between Default, Classic, or Own Colors.

Use the 'Own Colors' section below to customize each color individually.
A live preview will appear in the 'Preview Own Colors' box on the right.

As soon as you select Own Colors in the main 'Colors' box, your new scheme will go live.

Contrast Check

When you customize your own colors under SETTINGS > LAYOUT, J.SHOW checks the readability of each combination in real time against the WCAG AA standard (a contrast ratio of at least 4.5:1).

If two colors sit too close together — making text on top hard to read — a Low contrast hint appears. It shows the current ratio, a preview, and a suggested value. You can Keep value, Adjust to the suggestion, or — if several combinations need attention — fix them all at once with Fix all.

Use the Contrast check button for a complete overview: it lists every color combination for both light and dark mode at a glance. A green badge means the combination is easy to read, a red badge means there's too little contrast. The required minimum is shown per row.

Light / Dark Mode

To toggle between Light and Dark Modes:

Go to the bottom bar of the Platform and click LIGHT/DARK.
A 'Change View' window will appear.

Choose between Automatic (device setting), Dark, or Light mode.
Your choice applies to this device or browser – to every J.SHOW platform and the app you open on it. Other devices keep their own setting; a device on which you haven't chosen anything yet starts with your most recently saved choice.

Artist Abbreviation & Global Settings

To check or adjust global display settings:

Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM.

In the 'Global' box, verify the correct Artist Abbreviation is entered — this will appear in platform headers and export files.

Also check Language, Date Format, and Time Format settings to ensure they match your regional preferences.

Artist Platform: The selected language determines the default for new invitees and affects printed documents (e.g. daysheets, contracts).
You can choose a different language for each invitee at the time of invitation.

Agency Platform: The display language automatically follows your browser settings.

The platform is currently available in 25 languages: German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Norwegian, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, Turkish, Czech, Finnish, Greek, Romanian, Hungarian, Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Russian, and Ukrainian.

Event Number

Every Event can be given its own unique number, the Event no. — made up of the Artist Abbreviation and the internal event ID, e.g. QE-10772. Without an Artist Abbreviation, the subdomain is used in capital letters. It is switched off by default — until you switch it on, it doesn't appear anywhere.

Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM. In the 'Other' box you'll find the Event no. selection with On and Off.

Once switched on, the event number appears on the Event (desktop and mobile, below the basic information), on invoices and advance invoices (with all numbers if there are several Events) and as the placeholder {shownumber} in the contract and {show_number} in the invoice email. The placeholders are only offered when the event number is switched on.

Agency Platform: Under SETTINGS > GENERAL, the Switch on event numbers for all artists checkbox in the 'Other' box switches the event number on for all of the agency's artists. On the agency's Artist Platforms, the selection then also offers As set by agency (the default); with On or Off, an Artist Platform deviates from it.

Changing the subdomain

You can change the address of your platform (e.g. yourband.j.show) yourself — at most once in 365 days. After that, the next change is only possible one year later.

Artist Platform: Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM. In the 'Global' box, the first line 'Subdomain' shows your current address — click the pencil icon next to it. This requires the Admin permission level.

Agency Platform: Go to SETTINGS > GENERAL. The same line sits in the 'Global' box there. Only the agency admin can change it.

The 'Change subdomain' window opens. Enter the name you want under 'New address' — J.SHOW checks it while you type and tells you whether it is available. Allowed are 3 to 20 characters: lowercase letters (a–z), digits and single hyphens, but no hyphen at the start or end.

Tick 'I understand that the next change will only be possible in one year.' and click 'Change address now'. The switch only takes a few seconds.

What happens:

The window behind the pencil also shows the 'Previous address, redirects' — and, while the one-year lock is running, from when the next change is possible.

Have you entered an address of your platform somewhere yourself — on your website for the API, for example? The old address keeps answering such requests directly. It is still worth switching them to the new address when you get the chance.

Event List

The event list (EVENTS > OVERVIEW) displays all Events you have permission to view. Color codes allow you to quickly identify the current Status of each Event, both in the Event Title and directly within the list.

Status and Default Color Code in event list

*A blue bar next to a box inside an Event indicates recent changes have been made to that section.
These appear individually for each user and disappear once the user has seen the new information.

Filters and Search (Mobile)

The mobile event list offers advanced filtering and search features:

The same only my events button is also available in the event list on desktop. People who only see their own Events anyway don't get it.

Filter settings are saved and automatically restored the next time you open the list.

Map View

The Map View displays all your Events on an interactive map, showing venue locations as colored markers connected by tour route lines.

To open the Map View:

Go to EVENTS and click MAP in the top navigation.

The map will load, centered on your Event locations with automatic zoom to fit all markers.

To filter Events on the map:

Use the From and To date selectors to limit the displayed date range.

Filter by Event Type (e.g. Concert, Festival, Travel) or by Status (e.g. TBC, Option, Confirmed).

Check 'Only my events' to show only Events where you are part of the travel party.

Click APPLY to update the map with your filters.

To interact with Event markers:

Click on any marker to open a popup showing the Event date, Venue name, Show name, and Status.

Click the popup to navigate directly to the Event Overview.

Note: If Region Protection (Radius Clause) is configured for an Event, a circle will be displayed around the venue showing the protected area.

Note: Tour route lines automatically connect consecutive venues to visualize the tour path. A new line begins as soon as more than one day lies between two consecutive stops.

Focus View

The Focus View provides a condensed, printable overview of multiple Events with their key details — ideal for quick tour summaries.

To open the Focus View:

Go to EVENTS and click FOCUS in the top navigation.

Use Event types to choose which Event types appear — Show all and Hide all do it in one step, no type stands for Events without an Event type. Then narrow the range with from and to. Both selections are remembered.

To customize the displayed information:

Open Fields and tick what should appear. The sections sit in four groups:

Run of show — Planning status, To-do, Schedule, Private Note, Catering, Other, Custom field

Travel and Accommodation — Arrival, Accommodation, Departure, Travel Party, Vehicles

Venue and Contacts — Venue, Venue Specs with Stage, Logistics, Merchandise and Hospitality, plus CP Venue incl. Technician, Partner incl. CP and CP Other

Content — Files

Files shows the files of each event just like the Files box in the event view: by category, with the abbreviation showing who can see a file, and — if your platform is set up that way — the general files below. You can upload right here, also by drag & drop; as in the event, analyze with AI is available (file analysis). For each file a window opens where you can rename it, change category and visibility, share a link or delete it. If the event has its own venue, Copy from venue and Copy to venue are available too. On a support event that the headliner shares its files with, the headliner's files released for guests appear below — view only. You edit with the same rights as in the event. Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement see this section; it is not included in the PDF and Excel file.

Venue Specs is only a heading there: you tick the four parts below it individually, divided up as in the settings under Visibility Venue Information. That way you can, for example, put together only the Stage for the technical crew or only Merchandise for the merch company.

Indented below Planning status you find the individual statuses — Planning, Stage rider, Hospitality Rider and your own fields. Untick what you don't need here. You set the status right in the Focus View without opening the Event. Admin and Agency see this section, Tourmanagement only with the setting described under Planning status.

Click Show to apply your selection.

Click on individual Events to expand or collapse their details.

Tip — the selection has a budget: Every section you pick is built for every Event in the range. Arrival, Accommodation and Departure therefore weigh more than the others. Once the budget is used up, the picker refuses another tick and tells you so — remove one section and there is room again.

Columns or table:

The Columns | Table switch in the filter bar changes the layout; your choice is remembered.

In the Table, every Event is one row — days off and travel days included. The first column Event shows date, Event type, city and Venue or title, followed by one column per selected section with a one-line preview. Hover over a cell or tap it to open the full section next to it; the pencil lets you edit it.

The Planning status appears as narrow color columns, one per status, with a short label in the header — the full name shows on hover. Hatched cells mean the status does not exist for that Event type.

Sections with input fields can be edited right here — the form opens on top of the page, so you do not have to open the Event itself. This requires write permission for that Event.

Download as PDF or Excel:

To the right of Show sit the buttons PDF and Excel. The file contains what the Focus View shows after your last click on Show: period, event types, chosen sections and planning status — without buttons and forms.

Both follow the layout: from Table each Event is one row; from Columns the Events stand side by side — in the PDF five per page in landscape. In the Excel file, date, event type, status, city and venue have their own fields, so you can sort and filter.

A file holds at most 250 Events. If there are more, a note appears at the top — then choose a shorter period.

Note: The Focus View is available to users with Admin, Agency, or Tourmanagement permissions.

Databases

Tip — your sort order is remembered: J.SHOW remembers the last sort order you picked, per person, across all the big lists — venues, accommodations, partners, travel party, guest list, crew, conditions, expenses and finance plan. The next time you open the list, it shows up in the same order — across events, platforms and logins. Print and CSV export also follow your current sort.

Adding Venues

‘Venues’ added to the Venue Database of an Agency Platform will become available to all associated Artist Platforms.

Go to VENUES on top > + CREATE VENUE

A new ‘CREATE VENUE’ window will appear

Fill out the relevant information, such as address, contact person, capacity, parking, etc.

Address Suggestions: As soon as you start typing in the Name field, a list of matching places with their addresses appears below it. Only a click on a suggestion fills in Street, Postal code, City, State and Country — the search never fills a field on its own. Details you have already entered make the suggestions more precise.

No suitable suggestion? Then simply type the address yourself; close the list with Esc or by clicking next to it. Once you have accepted a suggestion the search stops offering more — anything you correct afterwards stays as it is.

Duplicate Check: If a Venue with the same name and city already exists in the Venue Database, a notification will appear to prevent duplicate entries.

Click SAVE

New ‘Venue’ will appear in the venue list

To add a ‘Venue’ to an individual Artist Platform, follow the same steps as above.

Note: You can generate and print a spreadsheet based on the venue list within the Artist Platform by selecting VENUES > EXPORT.

Import Option: If you're migrating from a previous software, your existing Venue Database can be imported into J.SHOW upon request.

To delete a Venue:

Go to VENUES > click on the Venue you want to delete.
An 'Edit Venue' window will appear.

Click DELETE THIS VENUE in the bottom left corner.

Stages & halls per venue

Larger venues often have several stages or halls (e.g. main hall, studio, club). In J.SHOW you create such stages directly on the venue: a stage automatically inherits the venue's address and contact persons, but has its own values for capacity, stage dimensions, backstage, load-in, parking, and files.

Creating and editing stages:

Open the venue (window 'edit venue'). In the Stages row, the venue and its stages appear as tabs — the first tab is always the venue itself.

Use + new to create a new stage. Clicking the name of the active stage tab renames the stage right there (Enter saves).

When you switch tabs, the color-highlighted sections (Stage: …) show the stage-specific fields. Name, address, website, and contacts always apply to the whole venue.

Note: Stages can also be entered right when creating a new venue — in the Stages section of the form.

Booking an event onto a stage:

Desktop: The event's venue form shows the Stages row: click the desired stage to book the event onto it — or click the venue itself if the hall is still open. With + new you create a stage and assign it to the event right away.

Mobile: In the mobile event form, pick the stage via the Stage: dropdown.

The event shows the combined name (e.g. Venue – Stage); in the venue list, each stage appears as its own directly selectable row below its venue.

Merging existing entries:

If stages used to be entered as separate venues (e.g. “City Hall Room A” and “City Hall Room B”), J.SHOW automatically suggests merging them. The links appear in the navigation bar of the venue list as soon as suggestions exist (admin and agency only):

Open VENUES > merge stages. Review each group, adjust the stage names, and click merge as stages — the existing entries become stages of the venue, and all events stay linked. Unchecked entries count as name duplicates and are absorbed into the venue entry.

The merge duplicates view works the same way for venues entered more than once: choose the entry to keep — events, contacts, ratings, and files are taken over; use to leave individual entries out of the group.

apply all suggestions applies all shown suggestions at once; individual suggestions can be put aside with hide and brought back later via show hidden suggestions.

Detaching or deleting a stage:

The stage tab offers three actions: detach from venue (the stage becomes a standalone entry again), delete stage (deletes only this stage), and delete venue incl. all stages.

The venue itself can be hidden from selection if events should always be booked onto a specific stage — events and data are kept, and it can be shown again via the add-stage form.

Turning an existing entry into a stage:
Often you only notice while creating a stage that the hall has long been its own venue in the list. That is exactly where the shortcut sits: in the add stage window, below the name field, you will find the Use an existing entry as a stage area. Pick the entry and click apply — it becomes a stage of this venue, and its dates and data stay untouched. Only entries that can actually fit are offered: same city, no conflicting address, no stages of their own. If there is nothing suitable, the area does not appear at all. And it is reversible — you can detach the stage again later.

Note: Stage management is available on both the artist and the agency platform. The AI assistant can also create and detach stages and book events onto stages.

Adding Partners

‘Partners’ added to the Partner Database of an Agency Platform will become available to all associated Artist Platforms.

Go to PARTNERS on top > + CREATE PARTNER
A new ‘CREATE PARTNER’ window will appear

Fill out the relevant information, such as company name, contact information, billing address, etc.

Under Type you choose what the partner is for you – including Freelancer. Below it, you can describe the type more precisely in the Specification field (up to 100 characters), e.g. “sound engineering”. In the partner list and in the partner box on the event, it then appears after the type: “Freelancer · sound engineering”. Without a specification, only the type appears there, as before.

Mobile: If you create a new partner on the event, you'll find the Specification field in the form as well. You change an existing specification in the desktop version.

Click SAVE
The new ‘Partner’ will appear in the partner list

To add a ‘Partner’ to an individual Artist Platform, follow the same steps as above.

Note: You can generate and print a spreadsheet based on the partner list within the Artist Platform by selecting PARTNERS > EXPORT.

To delete a Partner:

Go to PARTNERS > click on the Partner you want to delete.
An 'Edit Partner' window will appear.

Click DELETE PARTNER in the bottom left corner.

Accommodations and Their Types

ACCOMMODATIONS collects every place where your travel party sleeps, freshens up or parks – not just hotels. Accommodations added on an Agency Platform become available to all associated Artist Platforms.

Go to ACCOMMODATIONS on top > + CREATE ACCOMMODATION. The ‘Create accommodation’ window opens.

At the top of the window you'll find ‘Type:’. Click it to open the list and tick one or more types: Hotel, Hostel, Apartment / holiday flat, Private accommodation, Nightliner parking, Campsite. A hotel with bus parking is therefore ‘Hotel, Nightliner parking’. A new accommodation starts out as ‘Hotel’; at least one type always stays ticked.

The form only shows the fields that fit the type – with several types, all fitting fields. Address, contact details and Other are always there.

The parking space details sit under the heading Parking space: Power available, the number of connections per kind (Schuko, CEE 16A, CEE 32A), Cost per hour (Nightliner parking only), Cost per day, Opening hours and Parking space (size, height, number). Whatever you enter under Other becomes the event's ‘Other’ entry when you add the accommodation to an event.

A hidden field keeps its content – switch the type back and it's there again.

Address Suggestions: As soon as you start typing in the Name field, a list of matching places with their addresses appears below it. Only a click on a suggestion fills in Street, Postal code, City, State and Country — the search never fills a field on its own. Details you have already entered make the suggestions more precise.

No suitable suggestion? Then simply type the address yourself; close the list with Esc or by clicking next to it. Once you have accepted a suggestion the search stops offering more — anything you correct afterwards stays as it is.

Duplicate Check: If an accommodation with the same name and city already exists, a notification will appear to prevent duplicate entries.

Click SAVE

The new accommodation appears in the list; the Type column shows its types.

To add an accommodation to an individual Artist Platform, follow the same steps as above.

Filtering the list: Above the list on the left you'll find ‘Type:’, set to all. Pick a type to see, say, only campsites; a search term you've typed stays in place. Next to it is the radius search.

Parking space straight from a venue: In a venue's edit window, the + Add as parking space button sits below the Parking spot for nightliners field. It creates a Nightliner parking entry with this venue's address under ACCOMMODATIONS (copied once; if it already exists, no second one is created). You then land in the list and click the entry to add power, costs and opening hours.

Note: The ACCOMMODATIONS tab is available to Admin and Agency in the desktop version. With Tourmanagement permission you create accommodations from within an event (see Adding an Accommodation to an Event) – the ‘Type:’ selection is then also part of the create form in the mobile view.

Note: You can generate and print a spreadsheet based on the accommodation list within the Artist Platform by selecting ACCOMMODATIONS > EXPORT.

Import Option: If you're migrating from a previous software, your existing accommodations can be imported into J.SHOW upon request.

To delete an accommodation:

Go to ACCOMMODATIONS > click on the accommodation you want to delete.
An 'Edit accommodation' window will appear.

Click DELETE ACCOMMODATION in the bottom left corner.

Ratings

On the Agency Platform, Venues and Accommodations can be rated directly from the list view using a 5-star rating system.

Click on the stars next to a Venue or Accommodation to open a rating form.

Assign a star rating and optionally add a comment.

The average rating and the number of ratings are updated instantly (no page reload required). Ratings from other platforms are visible anonymously — only the platform name is shown.

Ratings are also included in the CSV export of the Venue and Accommodation lists.

Managing Venues, Accommodations and Partners

Adding New Entries

Inside an Event

Click on the icon inside the Venue, Accommodation, or Partner box within the Event Overview.
You’ll be redirected to the respective list, where you can search for the desired entry.

If it doesn't exist yet, click + NEW VENUE / + NEW ACCOMMODATION / + NEW PARTNER at the top of the page.

Fill out the relevant information and click SAVE to finish.
The entry will be automatically applied to the current Event,
and will also be saved to the corresponding list — making it available across other Events and Platforms.

Address Suggestions & Duplicate Check

Address Suggestions: When adding a Venue, an Accommodation or a Partner, a suggestion list appears for the name you type. A click on a suggestion fills in the address fields; without that click everything stays exactly as you entered it.

No suitable suggestion? Then type the address yourself — the list disappears with Esc or a click next to it, and after you accept a suggestion your corrections stay in place.

Duplicate Warning: If an entry with the same Name and City already exists, a notification will appear to prevent duplicates.

Radius Search

In the ACCOMMODATIONS and PARTNERS lists you can find entries near a place.

Above the list, enter a postcode or town under ‘Radius:’ and pick the radius next to it: 10, 25, 50, 100 or 200 km (default 25 km). Press Enter or change the radius, and the list only shows entries within that radius – also combined with a search term and, for accommodations, with the ‘Type:’ filter.

The first time, J.SHOW works out where the entries are, based on postcode, town and country; while that runs you'll see ‘Locating entries … N left’ next to it, and the list then reloads. Entries without an address that can be found never appear in a radius. If an entry's postcode, town or country changes, it is located again the next time.

The chosen radius stays active while you scroll or search the list. reset switches it off again. If J.SHOW doesn't know the place, you'll see ‘Place not found’ and the list stays empty.

Note: The radius search is available in the desktop version of the Artist and the Agency Platform.

Event-Specific Entries & Global Database

Any Venue, Accommodation, or Partner added from within an Event is automatically saved to the Global Database — and, if part of an Agency, also becomes available to all linked Artist Platforms.

When editing a Venue, Accommodation, or Partner inside an Event, checking the ‘Update dataset globally’ option will also update this entry in the Global Database.

Note: Other Events using the same entry will remain unaffected — they will retain the original version unless manually updated.

Note: For Vehicles, checking ‘Update dataset globally’ will apply the changes to all Events — past and future — that still use the exact same vehicle entry as before the update.

Import Option

If you're migrating from another system, your existing Venue, Accommodation, or Partner database can be imported into J.SHOW upon request. Contact support to coordinate your import.

Exporting Lists

To download a spreadsheet of existing entries, go to VENUES, ACCOMMODATIONS, or PARTNERS and click EXPORT.

Deleting Entries

To delete an entry from the Global Database:
Go to the appropriate tab (e.g. VENUES), click on the entry, and an Edit window will open.

Click DELETE in the bottom left corner.

Creating an Event

To create a new 'Event' of any kind on an Artist Platform:

Go to EVENTS.

Click + NEW EVENT.
A 'Select the Date' window will appear.

Choose the desired Event date from the Calendar.
The Basic Information window will open.

Straight from a calendar day: It's quicker from the CALENDAR (EVENTS > CALENDAR) or from Plan mode of the Event list (EVENTS > PLAN). Hover over a day and '+ new event' appears. One click creates the Event on that day immediately and opens it with its Basic Information — there is no confirmation window. In the Calendar the button sits to the right of the day number; in Plan mode it sits on the left, right after the date, on days without an Event.

Desktop: On a touch device using the desktop view there is no hover — the button is shown faded, but always visible.

Mobile: The mobile calendar view does not have this button. Create the Event there as usual via + ADD NEW EVENT.

Only permission levels that may create Events see the button — Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement when it may create new Events and edit all Events. It does not appear while you create or edit a Block in the Calendar, because clicking a day there picks the Block's period.

Adding Basic Information

To edit the 'Basic Information' box, click on next to it.

To edit an Event Date, click the icon next to Date in the 'Basic Information' box.

A field labeled moved from [Date] because [...] will appear, allowing you to explain the change.
If you don't uncheck the box, the note will be displayed in the 'Basic Information' box in the Event Overview.

Creating Time Ranges: If you've been booked for a festival but are not yet certain of the exact Event Date, use the + DAY feature to select additional possible dates.

Note: In the event list, the date will display as a time period—starting from the earliest to the latest selected date—even if some days in between are skipped.
Once the final date is confirmed, click the icon to select it as the final Event Date.

Important: For the most efficient use of the J.SHOW App, please create a separate Event for each day of a Tour—even for days such as travel or tear-down days.
The + DAY feature should only be used during the planning stage when the exact date is still uncertain.

Splitting a time range into separate Events: If an Event has additional days added via + DAY, the 'Basic information' window shows the button Split into separate events below + DAY (also on mobile). After a confirmation, each additional day becomes its own Event; this Event keeps only its own date.

The new Events take over everything from the Event — venue, partners, contact persons, schedules, catering, accommodations including the rooming, vehicles, travel party, visibilities, guest list settings, planning status and website details. Finances (contract, percentage deal, deductions, additional costs) stay with the original Event only, so the fee is not multiplied; guest list entries and comments are not copied.

Splitting is available to Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement when “Tourmanagement may edit all events” and “may also create new events” are enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS. While an open avail-sheet is running for the Event, the button does not appear.

If you have multiple shows on the same day, add a separate Event for every show and use the + TIME feature to define specific time frames for each show.

The times will then determine the order of Events in the event list.

Note: An Event's time zone automatically follows the selected venue — even if you switch the venue later.
If an Event has no time zone of its own — typically a day off without a venue in the middle of a tour — it inherits the one from the last preceding Event, as long as the tour continues: if another Event follows, the inherited zone applies across breaks of up to two weeks; directly after an Event it applies even without a following Event. Otherwise your Platform's time zone applies again. A rest day in Tokyo therefore stays in Tokyo instead of jumping home for a day. Canceled Events, ideas and options do not pass their time zone on.
Correct time zones are important for calendar syncs and iCal feeds.

Time difference: If the Event is in a different time zone than the day before, the Basic Information shows a badge next to the date with the clock shift (e.g. +6h / −1h) — on desktop and mobile. Hover over the badge: a tooltip names both time zones and explains whether clocks go forward or back.

Select the Type of Event (e.g. Tour, Festival, Travel, Setup) and the Venue Type (e.g. Club, Stadium, Hall).

Then select the Status of the Event from the dropdown menu.

If you set the Event status to TBA, you can also set an Announce On date and time. The Event will automatically become public at the specified moment.

Note: TBA affects the 'Event list for website' feature. Once the Event is publicized, it will automatically appear on your website if that integration is enabled.

Status and Default Color Code in Event Title and event list

Effectively naming an Event

TIP: Conveniently toggle between different Events by using the left and right arrows of your keyboard.

A date is entered the same way everywhere — one field instead of three separate boxes for day, month and year, in the desktop view as well as the mobile one. Before, entry behaved differently depending on where you were: sometimes it overwrote and jumped on, sometimes it appended, sometimes you needed the tab key.

Planning status

At the bottom of the 'Basic information' box you track how far an Event has been prepared. Every selection colors the edge of its field, so you see the state at a glance.

Planning — open, in preparation, prepared or completed.

Stage rider and Hospitality Rider — Sent, Received with comments or Final. These two only appear for Event types with a show.

Below them you find your own planning status fields, if you have created any (see Planning status fields) — each only for the Event types it is switched on for.

When you set Planning to completed, a window tells you that all sections of the Event that have not been filled in yet will now be hidden. They reappear as soon as you change the planning status. Got it, don't show again hides this notice for you permanently.

In the mobile view, Planning, Stage rider, Hospitality Rider and your own fields are also in the Basic information.

Note: Admin and Agency see and set the planning status. Tourmanagement can do so when the option Tourmanagement may set the planning status (on events it may edit) is enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS — and then only on Events it may edit.

Editing Multiple Events

To streamline your advancing process, you can conveniently edit multiple Events all at once.

Go to EVENTS > EDIT MULTIPLE.
An 'Edit Multiple' window will appear.

Click SELECT EVENTS and check all relevant Events from the event list that you want to update.

Then click EDIT SELECTED EVENTS to continue.
You will now be redirected back to the 'Edit Multiple' interface.

For each section you wish to edit (e.g. Title, Venue, Event Type), make your changes and click APPLY to confirm separately.

Note: Once a section has identical information across all selected Events, it will be underlined in green for easy reference.

Change Log

The Change Log shows platform-wide who changed what, and when: Events created, moved, edited, or deleted — as well as changes to the travel party. Every entry names the person and the time.

Desktop: The log appears as its own box on the start page. It is visible to all permission levels — each person only sees the entries that match their permissions.

The title of an entry (e.g. Event details changed) links directly to the Event in question. For changed Event details, the (i) icon opens an overview of the changed fields — with friendly field labels.

Click the magnifier icon in the box title to open the search: Search by date or person … searches the entire history — not just the entries currently shown. The search is available to every permission level, including Crew+, Crew and Guest; it only finds what you are allowed to see in the box anyway.

Who added whom to an Event's Travel party, and when, can also be traced through the log.

That an Event was deleted is visible to everyone who was allowed to see that Event – including Tourmanagement, Crew+, Crew and Guest.

Last edited, per box: In the Event view, every box (Basic information, schedules, catering, other info, accommodation, getting there, travel back, venue, partner, contact persons, custom fields …) has a small (i) in its bottom right corner; for an accommodation it sits at the bottom right of the first block with name and address. Click it to see in one line when and by whom that box was last saved: Last edited, date · time · name. Changes made through the API, the AI assistant and when applying a template count as well.

The (i) is available on desktop, on mobile and in the Focus view, and everyone who can see the box can see it. It only appears once something has been saved in that box, and it shows only the latest state — the full history remains in the Change Log.

Restoring earlier versions: Schedules 1–3, catering, other info and custom fields 1–3 keep their earlier versions – every save that changes something stores one, including via templates, the API or the AI Assistant. Open the box with and click VERSIONS. The list appears below the form, newest first, each with date · time · name; the current content is marked “Current version”. VIEW expands a version, RESTORE brings it back including title and visibility. The previous content stays in the list, so nothing is lost. UNDO next to it only reverts the last change.

The last 30 versions per box are kept; the content from before recording started is labelled “Version before recording started”. Versions are available on desktop and mobile for Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement – Tourmanagement only sees versions that were visible to Tourmanagement at the time.

Importing Events

If you are migrating from another touring software, J.SHOW supports bulk import of your existing Event data.

What gets imported:

Ideally, send us your export as a CSV. If that's not possible, any other format is fine too.

The import process automatically matches imported venues and promoters against your existing databases to prevent duplicate entries. New venues and promoters are created as needed.

Note: Event imports are performed by the J.SHOW support team to ensure data integrity. Contact support@j.show to coordinate your import — please include the export files you'd like to migrate.

The one-time migration of your data when switching to J.SHOW is free of charge.

Creating Tour Blocks

Tour Blocks are named time periods in your calendar — they serve both to group events (e.g. tour legs, festival runs) and to block out time when no shows should be booked (e.g. vacation, studio time, breaks).

There are two ways to create a Tour Block:

➀ From the Events Page:

Go to EVENTS and click + new block in the top navigation.

The Calendar opens in block creation mode. Click on a date to set the start of the block.

Click on a second date to set the end.

Enter a name (e.g. "European Leg", "Festival Run") and click Save.

➁ From the Calendar:

If you are already in the CALENDAR, click + new block.

Select start and end dates by clicking in the Calendar, enter a name and click Save. This method is especially useful for blocks without events — e.g. to mark a period as "blocked".

Tour Blocks are visually separated in the event list. In the Map View, however, they do not delimit the tour routes — a new line begins there as soon as more than one day lies between two consecutive stops.

In the event list every entry sits at its own date: a block's start on its first day, its end on its last day, each event on its day. A block that lies within another one (e.g. a rehearsal during a tour) therefore appears at the right place between the tour events, and both blocks are drawn as parallel lines. An event you explicitly assigned to a block but that lies outside the block's period is shown at the start or end of its block.

Note: Every permission level can open the CALENDAR, each with the Events it is allowed to open. Blocks and the + new block button only appear there if Blocks are released for that permission level (SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > "Blocks").

"No Tour" Option: When creating or editing a Tour Block, you can enable the No Tour checkbox. Blocks with this option will not appear in the tour selection in the Web Interface — useful for blocks that are meant to reserve a time period rather than represent a tour.

Automatic Assignment: Events without a block assignment are automatically sorted into matching Tour Blocks in chronological order if their date falls within the block's timespan. These automatically assigned events are displayed more subtly than manually assigned ones.

Who can see Tour Blocks: People with Admin, Agency or Artist permission always see Tour Blocks. Tourmanagement sees them if the option 'People with tourmanagement permission can see and add Blocks' is enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS in the 'Blocks' box. All other permission levels only see them if 'Everyone can see the Blocks' is enabled there — see also Events Permissions.

Who can create and edit Tour Blocks: Admin, Agency, Artist and — with the first option enabled — Tourmanagement may create and edit blocks. The second option, 'Everyone can see the Blocks', grants viewing only, not editing. Admin and Agency edit all Tour Blocks; Artist and Tourmanagement only the blocks they created themselves. Assigning events to a block — the Select Events button — is available to Admin and Agency only.

Tour Blocks in the calendar subscription: Your personal subscription (the 'Your events from this platform' box on the DASHBOARD) only includes Tour Blocks if you enable 'View event blocks in personal calendar' there; the option only appears if you are allowed to see Tour Blocks at all. The 'All events from this platform' subscription includes the Tour Blocks without a separate setting — but only if 'Everyone can see the Blocks' is enabled. See Calendar Subscription.

Exporting Event List

Whether you want to print Daysheets for multiple Events or create Text or CSV lists with or without Setlists:

Go to EVENTS and click the EXPORT button in the top navigation.
An ’Export’ window will appear.

Note: 'Subscribe to the calendar' is not part of the 'Export' window — you find it on the DASHBOARD in the 'Subscribe to the calendar' box, see Calendar subscription.

Choose from the listed options as mentioned above

Advancing a Tour

Whether you're planning the details, booking venues and partners, or managing your crew—J.SHOW keeps every event fully dialed.

Customizing an Event - 'Event Overview'

When you click on an 'Event' in the event list, you’ll land on the Event Overview—your central hub for everything you need to streamline and execute a smooth advancing experience.

AI Tour Routing

Got a bunch of open venue requests and aren't sure which order makes the most sense for the tour? AI Tour Routing computes a sensible order from your open availabilities — with a map and total kilometers.

How to reach Routing: In the event list, click Routing. A section opens with two tabs: Venue availabilities and Tour routing.

Note: The availabilities tool that feeds this (collecting venue availabilities from partners) is available to Admin and Agency without PRO — see Venue Avails.

Who can route: Admin, Agency, and Tourmanagement can create routings. People with Artist permission see saved drafts but cannot compute one.

Selecting Venue Availabilities

In the Venue availabilities tab you see your open availabilities — venues that are up for selection across several possible days.

Pick the availabilities that should feed into the tour.

A sheet of the type Several events is marked 'Bulk request' — it is enough for a routing on its own; otherwise you need at least two sheets. Days on which one of your own events falls (see Your own events block days) drop out, as do cells that have already become an event.

Computing the Routing

Switch to the Tour routing tab.

Set your conditions — such as a start and end point per block — and let the AI compute a sensible order.

Tour conditions: In the 'Tour conditions' box you set fixed limits that every suggested tour must respect. Each field is optional — empty means no limit:

'Max. shows per week', 'Max. shows on consecutive days', 'Max. nights away from home base (per tour block)', 'Max. days off in a row away from home', 'Max. km between two shows', 'Min. km between two shows', 'Max. km travel to the first show', 'Max. km drive home after the last show' and 'Max. shows per city'.

'Min. km between two shows' is a lower limit: two consecutive shows of a tour block should be at least this far apart, for instance so that the audiences don't overlap. What counts is the driving distance between the two shows, as with 'Max. km between two shows'. If the minimum is above the maximum, the form points this out – no tour can then keep to both limits at once. Two shows in a row at the same venue, such as two nights in the same house, do not count as a leg.

'Max. shows per city' limits how many new shows are planned in the same city. Fixed events don't count — a city with a fixed event stays open for a new show.

If the band stays somewhere between two tour blocks instead of going home, that is one trip: nights away from home base and days off away from home are counted across the stopover.

Under 'Shows only on these weekdays', untick the days on which no show should be played. With all days ticked there is no restriction.

J.SHOW checks every variant against these limits. Each variant shows under 'Your requirements' what is met (✓), what is not (✗, with the days concerned) and what cannot be checked automatically (○). J.SHOW remembers the values you last used for the next routing.

Anything that can't be expressed as a fixed limit still goes into 'Your instruction to the AI (optional)' as free text.

Steering preferred venues: In the field Preferred venues (★) you decide how the routing treats venues you have marked with ★ in the venue availabilities:

Ignore — ★ venues count like any other.

Prefer — small bonus when options are otherwise equal.

Strongly prefer — pick the ★ venue whenever possible.

Own event per ★ — a separate, additional show is planned for each ★ venue (on different calendar days).

A ★ on a single day (set in the sheet's cell, see Using the grid) works like a ★ on the venue, just for that day. It does not create a separate show.

If bulk requests are included, 'Events per bulk request' sets the maximum number of events to come out of one bulk request. Empty = as many as fit sensibly — never two on the same day.

Your own events with a venue in the period — and up to two days before or after it — feed into the calculation as fixed events. They are stops of the tour like any other: the routing plans the shows around them, a trip may begin or end with a fixed event and may even consist of fixed events only. Every fixed event appears in every variant, is marked 'fixed event' and counts towards the kilometres, the off days and the tour conditions.

Radius clause: If an existing event has an active radius clause, the routing does not schedule any availability whose day falls within the protection period (Protection from to Protection until, or the event day if none is set) and whose venue lies within the protected radius (as the crow flies). Canceled events don't count. Above the variants, 'Not scheduled because of a radius clause' lists which days and venues dropped out — with the protecting event, the distance and the radius. If nothing is left as a result, J.SHOW tells you that the available dates fall under the radius clause of existing events.

You get one or more variants, each with a map and total kilometers, so you can compare the routes directly.

Apply & Export

Once you've decided on a variant, you have these options:

Put on hold: The variant's stops are entered in the sheets as your options; the sheets stay open, and the venues are notified.

Apply routing: The computed routing is applied to your events; sheets of the type “One event” are closed in the process.

Save as draft: You store the routing to reopen and continue editing it later.

Print as PDF: You get the routing including the map as a PDF.

With bulk requests, every selected stop becomes its own event, and the buttons are named differently:

Create as idea — events with status idea; the venues aren't notified.

Create as option — events with status option; the venues are notified.

Confirm — confirmed events; the venues are notified, and the sheets stay open.

You choose per variant which stops are created (all / none). Stops from sheets of the type “One event” are handled as before. If a stop has since been booked, blocked by another event or already turned into an event, J.SHOW doesn't create it and tells you how many there were.

Venues

Adding Venue

To add a Venue to a specific Event:

Create a New Event or select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the Venue box. You’ll be redirected to the venue list.

From here, you have two options:

➀ Select an existing Venue from the venue list. Once selected, the Venue will be linked to your Event.

Note: If no Venues have been added yet, the venue list will appear empty.

➁ Click + NEW VENUE to create a new entry.

For a full breakdown on how to create a new Venue entry, please refer to the Managing Venues, Accommodations & Partners section.

Once saved, you’ll be redirected back to the Event Overview with the newly created Venue applied.

Note: The Venue will also be saved in the Global Database for future use across all Events and Platforms.

To make changes to an Event’s assigned Venue:

Click the icon inside the Venue box.
A ‘Venue’ window will appear.

Make the necessary changes and click SAVE.

Note: At the bottom of the window, you can choose whether to apply changes only to this Event, or check Update Dataset Globally to update the Global Database version.

Note: All members of the travel party assigned to this Event will be able to view the selected Venue information.

Adding Venue Specifications

To add 'Venue Specs' to a specific Event:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the Venue Specs box (only visible if the Venue section has already been filled out).
A 'Venue Specs: [Venue Name]' window will appear.

Fill out the relevant information (e.g. capacity, stage dimensions, etc.) and click SAVE.

Note: A single Venue can have multiple capacity options for different configurations (e.g. standing, seated, partial blackout).

Click + ANOTHER CAPACITY in the 'Venue Specs' window to create a custom input.

Then select the appropriate capacity for this specific show using the dropdown menu At this event:.

Dropdown options:

Note: Any Custom Capacity added via + ANOTHER CAPACITY — i.e. anything outside the default options — is automatically saved to the Venue’s entry in the Global Database and will be selectable, even if ‘Update dataset globally’ is not checked.

Note: If you want to apply the changes made to a Venue to the Venue Database, check Update dataset globally at the bottom of the Venue Specs window

Note: Under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > 'Visibility Venue Information', you can choose to hide various Venue Specs from users with specific permission levels.

Partners

Adding Partner Information

To add a Partner to a specific Event:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the Partner box. You’ll be redirected to the partner list.

From here, you have two options:

➀ Select an existing Partner from the partner list. Once selected, the Partner will be linked to your Event.

Note: If no Partners have been added yet, the partner list will appear empty.

➁ Click + NEW PARTNER to create a new entry.

For a full breakdown on how to create a new Partner entry, please refer to the Managing Venues, Accommodations and Partners section.

Important: From the ‘Type:’ dropdown menu, select the relevant Partner Category. This will rename the Partner box accordingly (e.g. Local Promoter, Travel Agency, Nightliner Company, Technical Supplier, etc.).

Once saved, you’ll be redirected back to the Event Overview with the newly created Partner applied.

Note: The Partner will also be stored in the Global Database for future use across all Events and Platforms.

Additional Partners (Partner 2 & 3)

Up to two additional Partners can be added per Event. After assigning the first Partner, empty slots for Partner 2 and Partner 3 appear on the desktop with a search button. On mobile devices, Partner 2 and 3 are available in the mobile event form.

Contact persons from all assigned Partners appear in the Event’s contact person dropdowns. Contacts are displayed with the company name in brackets to facilitate identification.

A contact's job title: In the Partner window, every contact — the first one and every further one — has a Job title field (e.g. Managing Director or Head of Booking). Unlike the function with a specific artist, it applies across the board. The contact list shows it after the name, EXPORT CONTACTS includes it, and the global search also finds contacts by their job title. This applies to artist and agency platforms.

Partner suggestion: When a partner slot is empty, J.SHOW automatically suggests the most recently used partner for the same city and event type. The suggestion appears directly below the empty partner slot and can be accepted with a click — no detour via the partner list. This feature is available on Desktop and mobile.

To make changes to an Event’s assigned Partner:

Click the icon inside the Partner box (now labeled with the selected Partner Category).
A ‘Partner’ window will appear.

Make the necessary changes and click SAVE.

Note: At the bottom of the window, you can choose whether to apply changes only to this Event or check Update dataset globally to update the entry in the Global Partner Database.

Override Partner Type per Event: The Type: dropdown inside the Partner window is no longer locked. If a Partner is sometimes booked as Local Promoter and sometimes as Festival, you can switch the Type for the current Event right there — the master record in the Global Partner Database stays unchanged. As usual, you can additionally check Update dataset globally to push the change up to the master record as well. If you switch the type on the event, the partner's Specification is dropped there – it belongs to the type stored in the Partner Database.

Adding Contact Persons (CP)

To add a variety of Contact Persons (CP) to an Event

Select the relevant ‘Event’ from the event list in EVENTS > OVERVIEW

Hit the inside the CP box in question (CP for Venue, Promoter, Technician, on site)

Fill out relevant CP information.

Note: If you click the icon in any Contact Person (CP) window, a dropdown menu will appear at the top of the CP window—but only if the linked Venue or Partner/Promoter already has contact persons assigned. You can then select one of those existing contacts from the dropdown, and the relevant information will be filled in automatically.
For example, in the CP Venue section, contacts linked specifically to the Venue will be available, while in CP Other, you’ll see contacts from both the Venue and any assigned Partners.

Check add as new contact to global venue database (in the venue contact) or add as new contact to global partner database (in the partner contact) if you prefer.

To add additional Contact Persons:

Click the icon inside the CP Other section.

You can once again select any pre-assigned contact persons from the dropdown for efficiency, or manually input the necessary information.

Note: Only 'CP Other' has the option of choosing visibility for certain permission groups.


Under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > 'Technical Contacts', you can define whether specific contact persons should only be visible to users with certain permission levels.

vCard Download

A vCard button is displayed next to each Contact Person, provided an email address or phone number is available and visibility permissions are met. This allows you to download the contact details (name, function, email, phone, company name) as a .vcf file and import them directly into your address book.

Schedules

To add a detailed Schedule of the Event, you have two options:

➀ Adding a Schedule from within the Event

Select the relevant ‘Event’ from the event list in EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Hit the inside the Schedule box.
A ‘Schedule’ window will pop up.

Name the Title of the Schedule next to Description:.

Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.

Select who this ‘Schedule’ is visible for and SAVE

➁ Adding a Schedule from a Template

Please visit Apply Event Overview Template to Events for detailed instructions.

To print the Schedule:

Go to EVENTS > select relevant Event > OVERVIEW > Hit the inside the Schedule box.

A PDF of the Schedule will be automatically generated.

Custom Field

To add an additional personalized box in the Event Overview (e.g. Interview appointment, etc.)

Select the relevant ‘Event’ from the event list in EVENTS > OVERVIEW

Hit the inside the Custom field box.
A 'Custom Field' window will appear.

Name the box ('Title:') and provide any relevant information.

Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.

Choose who can see this personalized box in their Event Overview and click SAVE

If a field only has a title, only people who may edit it can see it. Everyone else sees it once it has content.

Arrival & Departure

Scenario 1: Entire Travel Party will arrive and/or depart together

Adding Basic Travel Information: Arrival, Departure & Next Event

Use the Basic Travel window if the entire travel party is traveling together — either from the same starting location, to the same end location, or continuing to the next Event. No individual breakdowns needed.

To add Basic Travel Information (e.g. Venue, Accommodation, Homebase, distance, driving time):

Select the relevant Event from the event list in EVENTS > OVERVIEW

Click the icon in one of the following boxes, depending on context:

In the window that opens, fill in/select the relevant From: or To: location
Use the auto calc features to automatically generate Distance and Driving Time. Right next to it you pick the unit: km, mi or km + mi (which then reads e.g. “213 km / 132 mi”). This choice applies to that one calculation and is available without admin rights; which unit is preselected is set by the Platform setting Distance

Note: The venue or accommodation location, if provided for the next Event, will be automatic options in the ‘Next Event’ or ‘Onward Journey’ window, in addition to the ‘Homebase’.

At the very top of the Departure, Next Event or Onward Journey window, “Journey after the event” sets what follows the Event: Automatic, Next Event or Departure. Automatic means: Next Event if there is an event on the following day – otherwise Departure. When several events fall on one day, you decide here yourself.

If there are several events on the destination day, the “Destination event” field appears below it. There you choose which event the journey goes to; the suggested locations below (venue, accommodation) adjust immediately. If you choose nothing, the first event of the day applies. If there is exactly one event on the destination day, it stays fixed in the window as before.

Click SAVE to confirm

Location Suggestions:

Note: If members of the travel party will not travel together or have different locations/times, use Advanced Travel Planning instead.

Adding Homebase Information

Homebase is the J.SHOW concept term for an artist's default home location — usually the home or rehearsal address from which arrivals are planned and distances are calculated. Once a homebase is set, J.SHOW automatically suggests it as the starting point in the 'Arrival', 'Departure', and 'Next Event' fields.

To set the homebase of an artist:

Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM and enter the location in the 'Arrival from' field (placeholder Homebase).

Advanced Arrival & Departure

Scenario 2: Members of the Travel Party will arrive and/or depart individually to/from different locations.

Advanced Travel Planning: Arrival, Departure & Onward Journey

Use the advanced travel planning tools to organize how individual members of the travel party arrive at, depart from, or travel onward between Events — especially when people move in different ways or groups.
If several events fall on the same day, a field above lets you pick which one the journey refers to: Origin event for the arrival, Destination event for the onward journey. If you pick nothing, J.SHOW uses the closest event in time.
With individual planning, too, you can switch whether a Departure or the journey to the Next Event follows: tap the box heading (Departure / Onward Journey) with the small down arrow and choose Automatic, Next Event or Departure — on desktop and mobile.

To provide detailed travel information for Arrival, Departure, or Onward Journey:

Select the relevant Event from the event list via EVENTS > OVERVIEW
Click the icon in the respective Arrival, Departure, or Onward Journey box.

At the bottom of the window, click PLAN "ARRIVAL" INDIVIDUALLY or PLAN "DEPARTURE" INDIVIDUALLY — if another event follows, the button is called PLAN "ONWARD JOURNEY" INDIVIDUALLY.
From then on, this part of the journey is planned individually: instead of one shared entry for the whole travel party, you create separate travel entries.

You can now enter personalized travel details for individual members or sub-groups of the travel party — including departure and arrival times, transportation mode (e.g. Train, Airplane, Nightliner, Car / Van), distances, driving time, etc.

For individual arrivals, use the radio buttons under From to choose the starting point: the text field — prefilled with the Homebase, freely editable — or, if there is a previous event, its Venue or one of its up to three Accommodation options (each with city and postcode).
For an individual onward journey, you choose the destination under To the same way: the text field with the Homebase, or the Venue or Accommodation of the next event. For a departure without a following event there is only the text field, prefilled with the Homebase.
Google Maps automatically calculates the distance based on your selection.

Click SELECT under 'Vehicle' to assign a vehicle that has already been added to this Event — including its passengers.

Adding people: In the travel entry, + add opens the Add person window. Tick the people and click + add selected. Use the search field (search, reset) to narrow the list – your ticks stay set across several searches, and every ticked person is added, including those currently hidden. If you tap a name while people are already ticked, that person joins the selection and everyone is added; with no ticks set, a click on a name adds just that one person.

Stops: If a nightliner or van picks people up or drops them off along the way, add this to the travel entry. Below the auto calc you'll find + ADD STOP. For each stop, enter the City and Time, and under gets on / gets off pick people from the travel party via + Add person. The field “Note on this stop / Google Maps link” is a good place for a link to the exact meeting point – it is clickable in the view. Use the arrows to reorder and ✕ to delete a stop. Anyone not listed at a stop travels the whole way; anyone who gets on and isn't part of the entry yet is added automatically (as a passenger if a vehicle is assigned).

If stops have a location, auto calc calculates distance and driving time via all stops. In the Event view (desktop and mobile) and in the Daysheet, the stops appear between From and To. Stops are added by Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement; everyone who can see the travel entry sees them.

At the bottom of the window you decide who may see the travel entry: under “visible for Admin, Agency and …”, tick the permission levels Tourmanagement, Artist, Crew+, Crew and Guest — just like for schedules. All are ticked at first. Anyone listed in the entry always sees it, even if their level is unticked; Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement with editing rights see every travel entry anyway.

If you tick “only visible to people who are part of this "Arrival" (and TM)” (or “… "Departure" …”), only that rule applies: the level checkboxes are grayed out. Their selection is kept and applies again as soon as you untick it.

If an entry is not visible to everyone, editors see a short code of the allowed levels next to the icon, e.g. (TM, A); (-) means: only the people listed. The setting applies in the Event view on desktop and mobile, in the Daysheet and in the global search. COPY AS "DEPARTURE" / "ONWARD JOURNEY" or COPY AS "ARRIVAL" carry it over.

Click SAVE to confirm changes, or APPLY TO EVENTS to use the same travel configuration in other Events. If you copy to exactly one Event, you land in that Event afterwards; with several target Events you return to the original one.

Person Grouping:
Consecutive travel entries with identical persons are visually grouped in the overview. The "Who" field is shown only once, with intermediate steps separated by lighter dividers — keeping the display clear even with complex travel plans.

Copying Travel Plans:
You can duplicate a vehicle plan from one leg of the journey to another:

When copying, departure and arrival swap places: the return flight starts where the outbound flight landed — the arrival terminal (or platform) of one direction becomes the departure terminal (or platform) of the other.

Stops are carried over in reverse order: gets on and gets off swap places, and times are dropped. APPLY TO EVENTS copies them unchanged.

Resetting:

To return to the basic window, go to the Event’s OVERVIEW > SETTINGS and untick the box for the travel section in question: “Plan "Arrival" individually”, “Plan "Departure" individually” or “Plan "Onward Journey" individually”. Changes will apply automatically (refresh if needed).

Special Note on Vehicle Syncing:

If the travel party changes between legs (e.g. someone joins or leaves a vehicle), enable Separate Assignment to decouple the plan. This allows you to adjust the passengers for that specific ride without affecting the global Vehicle setup.

For example, a group of three may arrive together for the first show but add a fourth person to the same car for the rest of the tour.

Adding Flight Information

Quickly and conveniently add Flight Information for all Advanced Arrivals, Departures and Onward Journeys.

At the bottom of the Arrival, Departure or Onward Journey window, click PLAN "ARRIVAL" INDIVIDUALLY, PLAN "DEPARTURE" INDIVIDUALLY or PLAN "ONWARD JOURNEY" INDIVIDUALLY

In the travel entry, select Airplane under “Other mode of transport”

All you need to fill in is the Flight number: (e.g. LH 123 or DLH123 — both IATA and ICAO codes are automatically recognized)

J.SHOW recognizes the flight number and retrieves current flight data via the FlightAware AeroAPI. The following fields are auto-filled:

If multiple flights with the same flight number exist on that day (e.g. codeshare connections), a selection list is displayed.

Besides the terminal at the departure airport, J.SHOW also fills in the terminal at the arrival airport where known. Every travel entry has two fields for arrival, departure and onward journey: Terminal (departure) and Terminal (arrival) for flights, or Platform (departure) and Platform (arrival) for trains. Both appear in the Event Overview, on the day sheet and in the mobile view.

If the flight schedule itself has no terminal, J.SHOW suggests the departure and arrival terminal from the most recent flights with the same flight number on the same route — but only if those flights clearly used the same terminal. The suggestion is filled into the field and can be changed before saving. At airports without terminal information, the field stays empty.

Real-Time Flight Tracking

On the day of travel, the flight status is automatically updated in real time in the Event Overview. The following information is displayed:

The status is color-coded: green for active flights (scheduled, in flight, landed) and red for canceled flights.

Terminal from live data: If the live data on the day of travel report a terminal that differs from the one entered — or none has been entered yet — J.SHOW writes the live terminal into the travel entry, separately for departure and arrival. The Event Overview, the form and the day sheet then all show the same. Spellings such as "Terminal 5", "T5" and "5" count as the same and do not trigger a change.

Catering

Adding Catering Information

There are two ways to add Catering Info:

➀ Add Catering Info directly in the Event Overview:

Select the relevant Event from the event list via EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the Catering box.
A 'Catering' window will open.

Select one of the available options:
No Catering / Inhouse / Buyout: e.g. 20 € p.p. / By Order / Tour caterer

Use ADDRESS to provide a Google Maps link to the Catering Location

Note: For formatting options, see the Formatting a Textbox section.

➁ Apply Catering Info via General Template:

Visit the section Apply Event Overview Template to Events for detailed instructions.

Note: Once Catering Information is added and people have been added to the travel party, a summary of all Dietary Preferences (based on their profile data) will automatically appear in the Catering box. This meal summary is collapsed by default and only shows its header line (A total of X people) — click it to expand the details; the open state is remembered per event.

Visibility: The 'Catering' box is only visible to users with Admin, Agency, or Tourmanagement permissions — or to users with a 'Catering' Function assigned in the travel party.

In addition, the Catering window has visibility checkboxes that let you decide which permission levels are allowed to see the catering field — analogous to Schedule and Other. This makes it possible, for example, to hide sensitive catering information (prices, deals) from certain permission levels. The setting is available both on Desktop and in the mobile view, and it is automatically carried over when applying event-type templates.

Accommodations

Adding an Accommodation to an Event

To add an accommodation to a specific Event:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.
Click the icon inside the Accommodation box. You’ll be redirected to the list of Accommodations.
From here, you have two options:

➀ Select an existing accommodation from the list. Once selected, the accommodation will be linked to your Event.

Note: If no accommodations have been created yet, the list will appear empty.

➁ Click + NEW ACCOMMODATION to create a new entry.

For a full breakdown on how to create a new accommodation, please refer to the Accommodations and Their Types section.
In addition to general contact and location info, you can include, depending on the type of accommodation:

Once saved, you’ll be redirected back to the Event Overview with the newly created accommodation applied.

Note: The accommodation will also be stored in the Global Database for future use across all Events and Platforms.

To add General Accommodation Notes in a specific Event:

Before any accommodation has been assigned, click the icon inside the first Accommodation box. A Text Box inside the Accommodation window will appear.
This field can be used to enter custom information such as "private accommodation," "no hotel available," or "to be booked"—anything you want to provide more detailed context.

Note: if you click the icon in the same Accommodation box where you entered custom text, the text box will be replaced by an accommodation from the list.

You can still add additional Accommodation boxes afterward by clicking on the in the second Accommodation box.
However, custom text fields are only available in the first Accommodation box (the one with the icon), not in the additional boxes that only display a icon.

Once Accommodation 4 is filled, another Accommodation box appears below it. Click the icon there and choose an accommodation from the list as usual, or create a new one. After each filled accommodation the next box is added — so you can assign more than four accommodations to an Event, for example when band, crew and guests are spread across several places.

The additional accommodations from Accommodation 5 onwards work just like the first four: you can edit them, set who they are for, restrict visibility to the people entered in rooms, add Rooming, calculate the distance to the venue via , use “Copy data to all related dates of this tour period” for multi-day bookings, and remove them again. They always come after Accommodations 1–4; among themselves you move an accommodation up one position on desktop with the arrow in the header of its box.

They appear wherever the first four accommodations appear — in the shared Event view, in the Daysheet (selectable individually as Accommodation 5, Accommodation 6 …), in the rooming lists and in the offline view. When you duplicate an Event, they are copied along with their rooms.

Mobile and App platform: the additional Accommodation box appears in the mobile Event view as well; use the icon to edit Accommodation 5 and beyond directly on your phone.

Note: Overview Templates also cover the additional accommodations: once Accommodation 4 has rooms in the template, Accommodation 5 etc. appears below it. Applying the template, changing the Event type and APPLY TO EVENTS in the Rooming window carry these rooms over — the matching accommodation slot is created on the target Event. When sharing with Support or Feature platforms (SHARE), each additional accommodation has its own checkbox.

To edit an Event’s assigned accommodation:

Click the icon inside the Accommodation box.
An 'Accommodation' window will appear — make the necessary changes and click SAVE.

Note: At the bottom of the window, you can check Update dataset globally to apply your changes to the accommodation across all Events where it is used.

Note: To restrict visibility of an accommodation’s details to only those travel party members assigned to a room there, check only visible to people registered in this accommodation (and TM) in the bottom right corner.

Note: Click on in the respective 'Accommodation' box, then use the dropdown menu at the top of the 'Accommodation' window to specify who the accommodation is for — e.g. artists, crew, or a custom group via manual input.

Overnight Stay, Dayroom or Parking Space

The same accommodation can be where people sleep at one event and just a bus parking space at the next. That's why you set how it is used at the event itself – not in the list of accommodations.

Click in the Accommodation box. At the top of the window you'll find ‘Usage:’ with three options:

The change is saved right away. The box is then named after how the accommodation is used: Accommodation, Dayroom or Parking space – and so are the window title and the remove button (‘remove dayroom from this event’ or ‘remove parking space from this event’).

Default: If an accommodation is only Nightliner parking or Campsite, it automatically counts as a Parking space at the event, anything else as an Overnight stay. If you put a different accommodation into this slot, its default applies again.

Note: The parking space details belong to the accommodation itself – the window says so: ‘Stored with the accommodation – applies wherever it is used.’ Whatever you change here therefore applies at every event with this accommodation and also shows in the list of accommodations. The dayroom's time slot, on the other hand, only applies to this event.

The details appear wherever the box appears – in the Event view on desktop and mobile, in the shared event link, in the Daysheet and in the offline view. When you duplicate an Event, the usage is carried over. The rooming icon () only exists for an overnight stay.

Mobile and App platform: the ‘Usage:’ selection is also part of the edit window in the mobile Event view; the parking space details appear below it.

Note: The usage can be changed by everyone allowed to edit the Event – Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement.

Adding Rooming Information

To add Rooming Information for each accommodation:

Click the icon inside the Accommodation box.
A Rooming for accommodation "Accommodation name" window will appear.
You can now enter detailed rooming information, including the number and size of each bedroom via the dropdown menu.

Here are the examples of room types and their intended occupancy:

From here, you have two options:

➀ Click FILL ROOMS AUTOMATICALLY to automatically assign members of the travel party to rooms.

Note: This function is also available for multi-day accommodation bookings. It fills only the rooms of the day currently open — afterwards you can copy the assignment to the other days via APPLY TO EVENTS.

➁ Manually assign rooms by clicking the + icon next to each room. You can also indicate early check-in or late check-out per guest.

Note: If the same Rooming setup is needed across multiple Events, click APPLY TO EVENTS in the Rooming window. Select the desired Events from the event list and click TAKE HOTEL ROOMING TO SELECTED EVENTS.

Saving a rooming list as a template: In the Rooming window, click SAVE AS TEMPLATE. Choose + new template and enter a title — the new Overview Template then contains only this rooming list; when you load it, the rest of the Event stays as it is. Or pick an existing template: only the rooms of this accommodation are replaced there, everything else is kept. After SAVE you are taken to the template.

Note: Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement see the button on desktop. A new template can only be created while there are fewer than 9 Overview Templates.

Click the icon next to any person in the rooming list to edit their Hotel Special Requests and Cover Name directly — without having to navigate to their crew profile.

Note: Ensure the travel party has been selected; otherwise, the travel party list will appear empty.

Note: Rooming is shown on the Event even when the accommodation itself has not been decided yet — handy during tour planning, no placeholder accommodation needed. This applies on desktop, on mobile, and in the shared event link.

How the printed list looks is set in the drop-down window of the PDF button — the same window in which you pick the language. The button that produces the PDF sits at the top, the options below it:

One printout instead of two: the multi-day list now shows the Check-in and Check-out notes next to arrival and departure. Until now the single-day PDF carried the note but knew nothing of arrival and departure, and the multi-day one the other way round — you only got both by printing twice.

Consecutive Nights Stay

If the same accommodation is booked for multiple consecutive days, the Rooming window (click on in the respective 'Accommodation' box) will display all dates along with the corresponding room assignments. It also highlights any early check-outs or late arrivals per day. If a person is assigned to the same room across multiple days, you can include or exclude them from specific dates by clicking the checkbox next to their name for the corresponding day.

Note: To quickly preview rooming assignments directly in the Event Overview, click the icon in the Rooming box.

Note: For a multi-day booking, the Accommodation box also shows the booking period (Date range: arrival–departure) right above the rooming — on desktop, on mobile, and in the shared event link.

To apply the accommodation information to all relevant days of a particular reservation:

Click the icon inside the Accommodation box.
An 'Accommodation' window will appear.
Check Copy data to all related dates of this tour period.

Miscellaneous Accommodation Infos:

You can enter separate breakfast times for weekdays and weekends.
If no breakfast is provided on certain days, you can either leave the fields blank or enter “N/A.”

To automatically calculate the distance between the accommodation and the Venue after a Venue has been selected for the Event, click on next to 'Distance to Venue' in the Accommodation window.
You can also manually enter the distance from the accommodation to the nearest train station and to the city center/downtown.

To add additional details — such as the reservation number, cancellation deadline, contact person, PIN code, booked through, and booked for — click MORE INFORMATION ABOUT THIS BOOKING in the Accommodation window. Once entered, click SAVE to confirm the information.

To print a PDF or CSV for the current day’s rooming:

Click PDF or CSV in the 'Rooming for accommodation "Accommodation name"' window, or use the icon in the Rooming box in the Event Overview.
To print a complete rooming list covering all days at this accommodation, select PDF (MULTI-DAY) or CSV (MULTI-DAY) in the same window, or click the icon in the Rooming box in the Event Overview.

Note: All versions include guest names, room assignments, check-in/out times, and dates.

Note: When exporting a multi-day rooming list as a PDF or CSV, any person assigned to the same accommodation in multiple, non-continuous time blocks (with gaps in between) will appear in as many separate rows as there are booking blocks. This indicates distinct check-in periods for each time block.

Finishing Event Planning

Finishing Event Planning

In the 'Basic Information' box at the top left of the Event Overview, you can set the processing state of a Show via the Planning status field. Four stages are available:

When many Shows are running in parallel, the first column of the event list instantly tells you which Show still needs advancing, which one is fully prepared, and which one is completely finished.

Important: Once the status is set to "Completed", all empty fields in the Event will be hidden.
This helps keep the layout cleaner for Admins, Agencies, and Tour Managers once planning is complete.

Printing Daysheets

If the Planning status in the Basic Information box is set to Completed, then the Daysheet can be printed by all users who can access the Event.

To print the Daysheet, go to EVENTS > select relevant Event > OVERVIEW > DAYSHEET > a Daysheet Preview appears > click on PDF

As long as the status has not been set to Completed, only Admin, Agency, and Tourmanagement users who are part of the travel party can print these documents.

The font size of the Daysheet can be adjusted by Admin and Agency either through the Daysheet Preview at the top right of the bar or via SETTINGS > DAYSHEET, where you can also select which elements should be included on the daysheet.

Showing or Hiding Fields per Event

Sometimes a single Daysheet should include a field that you've globally hidden — or vice versa. Instead of changing the global settings, you can now override which fields appear on the Daysheet on a per-Event basis.

Open the Daysheet Preview as described above. In the top right, click Fields.
A window opens listing every Daysheet field, grouped into General, Arrival, Addresses, Contact Persons, Event, Accommodation, Venue Specs and Other.

Fields that are currently shown are pre-checked. Fields that are suppressed by your global Daysheet settings or simply have no content appear dimmed — you can still click them to force them on for this Event.

You can go even finer within the Arrival and Contact Persons groups: individual arrival/onward-travel positions and individual additional contact persons can be shown or hidden separately. The preview updates instantly after every change.

Note: The selection only applies to this single Event. The defaults for all Events remain controlled via SETTINGS > DAYSHEET.

Mobile: The Fields selector is also available in the mobile Daysheet Preview — selecting and saving works the same as on Desktop.

Mobile: When you tap PDF in the mobile Daysheet Preview, Generating PDF... appears briefly — then your phone's share sheet opens directly, so you can save, send or print the PDF. If a Share button appears instead, tap it once more. If your device can't share files, the PDF preview opens as before.

Choosing the Daysheet Language

The Daysheet Preview offers a language dropdown in the top right. Use it to print a Daysheet in a language other than your platform language — handy when the crew comes from several countries. The dropdown lists every language J.SHOW currently supports, so you can output the Daysheet in any of them.

The Travel Party

Using Travel Party Templates and the Crewbooking Tool Together

Whether you're building from a fixed core team, managing rotating crew, or mixing both — Templates and the Crewbooking tool work hand in hand to streamline your workflow and make the booking process as efficient as possible.

Travel Party Template

Creating a Travel Party Template

To create a core group or pre-filter a list of desired crew members for a specific Event or an entire Tour:

Go to TEMPLATES > TRAVEL PARTY > + NEW TEMPLATE.

Click + ADD PERSON and select all relevant people from the people list.

Click + ADD SELECTED at the top.
All selected people will now appear in the travel party list.

To rename the Template, click RENAME, enter a new name in the 'Rename' window, and click SAVE.
To delete the Template, click DELETE > YES.

Note: Once created, this Travel Party Template will appear in the dropdown menu under PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING.

Applying a Travel Party Template

You have three options for applying a travel party setup to multiple Events:

➀ Copy Travel Party Without a Template

If you've manually built a travel party inside an Event, you can apply this exact setup to other Events without creating a Template.
In the TRAVEL PARTY tab, click COPY TO EVENTS.

Select all target Events and click COPY TRAVEL PARTY TO SELECTED EVENTS.

Note: This method is ideal for quick repetition of an existing setup — no template required.

➁ From the Template Section

Go to TEMPLATES > TRAVEL PARTY > APPLY TO EVENTS.

Choose whether to FILL UP or REPLACE the list of people.

Check all relevant Events in the event list.

Click APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS to confirm.

➂ Applying Template from Within an Event

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list.

Go to TRAVEL PARTY > TEMPLATE.

Choose the travel party Template you want to apply to this Event.

Decide whether to FILL UP or REPLACE the existing travel party.
Changes will be applied immediately.

Required Crew per Event Type

To define exactly which functions — and how many of each — are required for each specific Type of Event (e.g. Show vs Festival vs Tour):

Go to TEMPLATES > TRAVEL PARTY > REQUIRED CREW DEPENDING ON TYPE OF EVENT.

From the dropdown menu, select the type and number of people required for each position within the respective Event Types.

Under the EVENTS > TRAVEL PARTY, you will now see a list of all required positions for that Event Type, which ones are currently filled based on the applied travel party, and which are still missing.
If any required positions are unfilled, those will be highlighted in red to alert you that someone is missing.
You can then adjust the travel party to ensure all necessary positions are covered — making it easy to prepare every Event with full team coverage.

Manually Adding Travel Party Members

To manually add Artists, Crew, Tour Managers, or any other team members to the Travel Party of a specific Event:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS.

Go to TRAVEL PARTY in the lower bar and click + ADD.
A list will appear showing all available People from your people list.

Select the individuals you want to include in the travel party.

Click + ADD SELECTED to confirm your choices and populate the Event’s travel party.

Double-booking warning: If a person is already scheduled on another Artist Platform for the same day, an orange warning icon appears underneath their name with the note Already booked elsewhere on and the date. The warning blocks nothing — you can still book them, but you know beforehand. For privacy reasons it does not reveal which artist or which venue is involved. If you are logged in to other accounts yourself, they count as the same person here.

Mobile: In the mobile travel party, you can also tap several people to select them at once — a pinned button adds them all in one step. People who are already booked appear grayed out.

Adding people to multiple Events: Under PEOPLE you'll find Add people to events (visible to Admin, Agency, and Tourmanagement) — it adds selected people to several Events in one go. This now also works on mobile, as a two-step wizard: first pick the people, then tick the Events.

Adding people without access: Add guests or companions who have no profile of their own via MANUAL INPUT — at the top of the people list after + ADD. Enter name, function and, if needed, food and hotel details, then click ADD.

If the same person comes along often, tick “Remember for future events”. For every further Event they are then offered at the top of the window under “Saved manual entries”: select them, the fields are filled in, click ADD.

The icon next to the selection opens the saved entries. Use the ✕ to the left of a name to remove it from the list — Events the person is already listed on stay unchanged.

Note: Manual input is available on desktop for Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement. Saved entries apply to the whole Platform.

Closing the travel party and vehicles

Once planning is done, you can close the travel party and the vehicles of an Event separately — so nobody changes anything there by accident.

Go to EVENTS > select the Event > TRAVEL PARTY and click CLOSE TRAVEL PARTY. Confirm the prompt.
For the vehicles, click CLOSE VEHICLES in the VEHICLES tab.

The heading then shows a lock and “Closed on … by …”. While it is closed, nobody gets buttons for adding, loading templates or editing. Anyone allowed to make changes first clicks REOPEN TRAVEL PARTY or REOPEN VEHICLES.

Mobile: The same buttons are available in the mobile travel party and the Event's vehicles.

Admin and Agency can close, reopen and change them. Tourmanagement can only do so if Tourmanagement may change closed travel parties and vehicles is ticked under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS (off by default) — and only on Events they may edit. Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement see the note.

Note: Anyone who may not change a closed section can't change it via COPY TO EVENTS / APPLY TO EVENTS, templates or a change of Event type either. The API and the AI assistant never change closed sections.

Travel Party Passive Function

J.SHOW offers a Passive Function for Members who need to be included in the Travel Party so they can access Event details, but who either:

To activate the Passive Function for a specific person:

Navigate to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > go to TRAVEL PARTY.
In the 'Passive' column, check the box next to the relevant person, based on the following options:

Note: Once a person is marked as 'passive' and appears grayed out in the list, they will no longer be visible to other users in the travel party — except for Admins and Agency members.

Uploading Files for Travel Party Members

For a full breakdown on how to upload files for specific members of the travel party, please refer to the Uploading Files section.

Travel party as PDF

Go to EVENTS > select the Event > TRAVEL PARTY > PDF.
In the window, Hide Contact Data (Email / Phone) lets you leave out email and phone for individual people or everyone.

If needed, enable Catering info per person (diet, allergies, special requirements) and click PDF.

The PDF always shows the number of people at the top. With the catering checkbox, a column per person with diet, allergies and special requirements is added, plus a summary of dietary requirements below the list.

Visibility: Only Admin, Agency, Tourmanagement and people with the Catering function see the catering checkbox.

Email the travel party

You can email the whole travel party directly from J.SHOW — and each person automatically gets their own files attached, e.g. a flight ticket or voucher.

Go to EVENTS > select the Event > TRAVEL PARTY > MAIL TO EVERYONE.
The “Email the travel party” window appears.

Enter a Subject and Message. Insert {NAME} and Insert {SHOW} add placeholders: {NAME} is replaced per person with their first name (or the full name if no first name is stored), {SHOW} with the event.

Under General Attachments, upload files that everyone receives. They stay in the window after sending and go out to everyone again with the next email — that is why they are shown large and bold with a paperclip, and the confirmation before sending lists them once more. Remove anything that should not go out again beforehand with the red ✕ next to it.

Keep Attach each person's own files from the travel party enabled so each person also receives the files you uploaded for them in the travel party (see personal files for travel party members). The files are listed under each name in the recipient list; if you untick it, they are hidden there and not attached.

Under Recipients, everyone with an email address is preselected. Use Select all / Deselect all or the individual checkboxes to adjust the selection. People without an email address are grayed out and cannot be selected.

Send Test Email sends a sample to yourself — with the attachments of the first selected person. Send Email to All sends the email to every selected person individually. If not everyone is ticked, the button reads “Send to 3 Selected”, the bottom line says “3 of 8 selected”, and deselected names are dimmed. If nobody is selected, the button cannot be clicked.

Note: The attachments of one email may add up to at most 18 MB. If they are larger, that email is not sent and is reported as “Not sent”.

Note: The Send History of recent sends is shown at the bottom of the window. Open in your own mail app instead (without attachments) still takes you to the previous route via your own mail app.

Visibility: Available to Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement — tour managers if they are in the travel party themselves or may edit all events. Desktop only.

The Crewbooking Tool

Whether you're staffing a full Tour or filling individual positions for a one-off Show, the Crewbooking tool gives Admins and Agencies full control. See who’s available, assign positions per Event, and keep everything flowing—fast and friction-free.

Activating the Crewbooking Tool

The Crewbooking tool can only be activated with an Admin or Agency Permission Level.

To do so, go to PEOPLE > OVERVIEW > select the relevant Person > an Edit Person window will appear > check the box next to use crewbooking tool.

Visibility & Access Based on Permission Levels:

Providing Availability via Crewbooking Tool

Once the Crewbooking tool is activated, a Crew Member can go to EVENTS > OVERVIEW and will now be able to check their availability ( I am available / I might be available / I am not available) for each Event under available.

Important: If a Crew Member has already confirmed availability for a different Event on another Artist Platform for the same date, a pop-up warning will appear.

This alert notifies them of the scheduling conflict and provides a shortcut: within the same pop-up, they can instantly review and update their availability for all Events occurring on that day across all platforms. From another platform, only Events that its Event list also shows them appear here.
This helps prevent double bookings and gives Crew Members full visibility over their schedule in one place.

When a crew member selects 'I might be available', a comment field will appear where they can provide additional context. This comment will be visible in two places:

➀ Under PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING, by selecting the relevant Function or Travel Party Template from the dropdown. A list of all associated crew members will be displayed, and the comment will appear in the form of ... next to the relevant Event and under the crew member’s name. Click on this icon to view the comment.

➁ Under EVENTS > [Select Event] > TRAVEL PARTY > + ADD — when navigating to the specific crew member, their comment will also be visible there.

Note: As a last-resort workaround, Admins or Agency Personnel can submit a Crew Member's availability on their behalf by navigating to PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING, selecting the relevant Function / Template, scrolling to the bottom of the list, and activating the checkbox edit availability. This enables them to manually mark the person’s availability in the list.
Transparency First: If someone else changes your availability, you will receive an automatic email notification letting you know who made the change and for which Event.

If you've been booked for a specific Event, you will now see a blue mark under booked in the event list.

Crewbooking tool notifications when activated:

With request availability you can follow up deliberately in the Crewbooking tool: tick events and people, send. Behind each name you see for how many of the upcoming events nothing has been entered yet — pre-selected are exactly the people with something open. Recipients are only people with an active Crewbooking tool; anyone using the app also gets a push message.

Booking protection: report availability first, then get booked

With an active Crewbooking tool, you can decide yourself that nobody books you for an Event before you have marked 'I am available' for it.

Desktop and mobile: Open your profile (see Editing Your Profile). Right below 'use crewbooking tool', tick 'Only let people book me after I have marked “I am available” myself'. The setting is saved right away and applies to this platform.

While booking protection is on:

The option is only offered if the Crewbooking tool is active for you — without it you could never report 'I am available' and would not be bookable at all.

For Admins, Agencies and Tourmanagement: When adding people to the travel party, a lock appears behind the name of such a person. If you try to book them anyway, they are not added. Instead, a window opens listing everyone who was not booked for this reason. With 'Send reminder' you ask them to enter their availability for exactly this Event — by email and, if they use the app, by push as well.

Confirming Crew Members via Crewbooking Tool

Admins and/or Agency users can confirm Crew Members for specific Events using several methods:

➀ Go to PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING.

In the dropdown Function / Template, select the relevant Function.
You will now see the availability of people with this Function across all listed Events.

Conveniently book your Crew or mark that a Person was definitely not booked for a specific Event.

➁ Go to PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING.

In the dropdown Function / Template, select the relevant Template.
This will display the availability of all crew members included in that Travel Party Template — regardless of whether their Crewbooking tool is activated — across all listed Events.

Conveniently book your Crew or mark that a Person was definitely not booked for a specific Event.

➂ Go to Event Overview > TRAVEL PARTY > + ADD.

You will see all available people for this specific Event, indicated by the green checkmark on the left-hand side.
Unavailable people are marked with , and unsure people with .

Click the blue checkmark to automatically add the corresponding Person to the travel party.

Important: If a person has several functions in their Profile, this is the only way to add them to the Event with two assigned functions.

Days booked: Below the table in PEOPLE > CREW BOOKING, the row Days booked shows for each person the total of days they are firmly booked, across all pages of the list. Multi-day dates count every day, canceled dates don't count. When you book someone or remove a booking, the number updates right away. (Desktop)

Note: If Tourmanagement may edit all events is ticked under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS, people with Tourmanagement permission can also confirm or cancel people via the Crewbooking tool.

Note: People with an active Crewbooking tool can always see all Events in the event list — at least all Event types that are enabled for them.
However, if the Platform’s Visibility of Events setting is activated (SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > 'Visibility of Events'), they will only be able to open Events they are listed in as part of the Travel Party.

Crew Booking Notifications

If the Crewbooking tool is activated, users may receive notifications for:

These notifications are sent via email and additionally as app push notifications when the person is logged into the J.SHOW app.

Bundled emails: If several availabilities of one person are changed in quick succession, J.SHOW sends one tidy summary email listing all affected Events instead of many single emails — once no further change has been made for about five minutes.

Push notifications for the Crewbooking tool can be globally enabled or disabled under SETTINGS > NOTIFICATIONS (default: enabled).

Note: For a detailed breakdown of Crew Booking notifications, please refer to the Crewbooking tool section.

Specific Event Types

If a crew member is needed only for specific Event Types, below the option use crewbooking tool you can click on notify only for specific event types to select which Event Types this Person is needed for. The Person will then only receive Emails about new Events for the selected Event Types.

Note: If the Platform's Visibility of Events is enabled, or the Person has Guest permission, only Events with the corresponding Event Types will be visible in the event list for this Person.

Notice Banner for Restricted Event View

When a user with an active crewbooking tool switches via View as to a permission level with restricted event visibility (e.g. Crew, Crew+ or Guest), or may only see certain events because of Visibility of Events, the event list shows a yellow notice banner at the top. It explains why all events are still visible: the crewbooking tool needs the full event overview so the person can correctly mark their availability. The banner appears on both Desktop and in the mobile view.

Hiding Events with Status Idea or Option

Under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > Visibility of Events you will find the checkbox Hide events with status Idea or Option for people with crewbooking tool. When it is ticked, crewbooking tool users do not see events with status Idea or Option at all — only from tbc or Confirmed onwards. It controls both the notifications and the visible event list for crewbooking tool users.

Note: This option used to live under SETTINGS > NOTIFICATIONS and has been moved into the permissions because it affects not only emails but also the visible event list.

Crew Conditions

The Crew Conditions feature allows you to send conditions and agreements to crew members, who can then confirm or decline them. Access this feature via PEOPLE > CONDITIONS.

Dashboard

On the Dashboard, crew members see their pending conditions with a status badge. The Please confirm badge is clickable and leads directly to the conditions page — on both desktop and mobile.

The following details are shown:

The crew member accepts the conditions with Confirm or turns them down with Reject and adds a comment.

Conditions Overview

The overview (PEOPLE > CONDITIONS) shows a table of all crew members and their current conditions with Function, the Show daily rate, Status and Valid from. If a crew member has a secondary function, a separate row is displayed for each function.

The Status column shows Sent until the crew member has replied, then Confirmed or Rejected. Conditions that have not been sent yet appear as Draft.

Clicking a row opens that person's conditions. Under History you find every version there: the Agreements column shows the agreement texts (visible to all permission levels), the Comment column the crew member's reply.

Emails: When conditions are sent, a personalized introduction is generated containing the sender's name and the name of the crew member's function.

Global Crew Register

The Global Crew Register is visible to all People with Admin, Agency, or Tourmanagement permissions under PEOPLE > GLOBAL.

Note: People who have opted into the Crew Register always have access to the Global Crew Register, regardless of permission level.

In the Profile Settings, you can activate the checkbox Show my contact in global crew register, which lists your name, email address, phone number, functions, and associated Platform(s), plus your qualifications and languages. People invited with the Crewbooking tool see the same checkbox when they accept the invitation. It is not pre-ticked: only those who tick it themselves are added to the Global Crew Register.

Next to the contact details, the list shows the columns Languages spoken and Qualifications, just as people have entered them in their profile (see Languages and qualifications). For a qualification only its name appears, without proof or expiry date; expired qualifications are not shown at all. Above the list you can filter by Function, Language (only languages someone in the register speaks are offered) and Qualifications: part of the name is enough there, then click search. The list appears as soon as a filter is set; reset clears all filters.

Vehicles

There are several ways to add Vehicles — but most commonly, new Vehicles are added directly within a specific Event.
Once added, the Vehicle is automatically saved to the global Vehicle Database for future use.

Note: Vehicles can only be added in Artist Platforms, not in the Agency Database.

Adding Vehicles in Events

To add Vehicles inside a specific Event:

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > VEHICLES > + ADD.

You now have two options:

➀ Add a New Vehicle

Click + ADD NEW VEHICLE.

Enter all relevant details, such as Label (required), Vehicle type, Driver, License plate, Number of available seats, Bed availability (if applicable), General comments, etc.

Click SAVE to finish.

Note: The Vehicle will automatically be saved to the global Vehicle Database.

➁ Select an Existing Vehicle

If Vehicles have already been added to the global database, you can choose one from the vehicle list.

To assign passengers to a Vehicle:

Click ADD PERSON under the relevant Vehicle.

Check all travel party members on the list traveling in this Vehicle.

Click + ADD SELECTED to confirm.
Passenger names will now appear below the Vehicle information.

Who is missing? Below an event's vehicles, J.SHOW shows two summary lines:

The number is shown in brackets. The lines only appear when there is something to report, and only for Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement — on desktop, mobile and in the focus view. Passive members visible to Admin/Agency only are not counted as missing.

Once all Vehicles have been added to the Event, you can apply the same setup to other Events.

In the VEHICLES tab of the Event, click on APPLY TO EVENTS.

Select all Events from the event list where you'd like to copy the current fleet (including passengers).

Click COPY VEHICLES TO SELECTED EVENTS to finish.

Note: When copying Vehicles from one Event to another — either via APPLY TO EVENTS or when loading a Vehicle Template into an Event — you’ll be asked whether to REPLACE the existing fleet or FILL UP the current one with additional entries.

The Vehicle(s) will now appear in the VEHICLES tab of the Event.

Important: If you update a Vehicle’s details via , you can check 'Update dataset globally' to apply the changes to all identical entries in the Vehicle database and across all Events — past and future — using that same Vehicle.

Note: You can close an Event's vehicles so nobody changes them by accident — see Closing the travel party and vehicles.

Creating Vehicle Templates

For Tours or recurring setups, you can create a fleet of Vehicles using Vehicle Templates — a pre-set group of Vehicles (often with assigned passengers) that can be reused across multiple Events.

The most common way is to create Vehicles directly inside an Event, assign passengers, and then apply this setup to other Events using APPLY TO EVENTS (see above).
Alternatively, you can build reusable templates in advance: Go to TEMPLATES > VEHICLES > + NEW TEMPLATE.

Click + ADD VEHICLE to select a vehicle from the vehicle list, or + ADD NEW VEHICLE to create one from scratch.

To assign passengers inside a Vehicle Template:

After adding a Vehicle, click ADD PERSON to assign passengers from the Global Crew Register.
This is especially useful for Tours with consistent transportation arrangements.

Note: If certain people get off early or join later, you can make individual adjustments inside each Event.

Applying Vehicle Templates to Events

To apply a Vehicle Template to Events, you have two options:

➀ From the Template Section

Go to TEMPLATES > VEHICLES > APPLY TO EVENTS.

Select all relevant Events and click APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS.

➁ From the Event Itself

Click on LOAD TEMPLATE under the VEHICLES tab in a specific Event to select a predefined Vehicle Template.

A ‘Choose a Template’ window will appear, listing all available Templates.

Choose whether to FILL UP (add to existing Vehicles) or REPLACE (overwrite them).
Passenger assignments from the Template will be carried over and remain editable within the Event.

Adding Vehicles to the Database

To add Vehicles directly to the database (less common method):

Go to VEHICLES > + ADD NEW VEHICLE
A new 'Add New Vehicle' window will appear.

Enter the relevant information such as Vehicle type, License Plate, Number of Seats, etc.

Click SAVE to finish.
The Vehicle will now appear in the vehicle list.

Uploading Files

Need to upload train tickets for one person or share a full festival schedule with the whole crew?
Whether it's personal or general, J.SHOW makes file uploads fast, flexible, and freakishly efficient.

Note: Files can only be uploaded by Admin, Agency, or Tourmanagement (if granted permission), except on the Dashboard under 'personal Files'.

Uploading Personal Files Not Linked to an Event

Go to PEOPLE > FILES > click on next to the Person you want to upload personal files for.
A 'Upload File: [Name]' window will appear.

Choose a file or drag-and-drop it inside.

Click UPLOAD to finish.
These files will be visible to the respective person under DASHBOARD > 'Personal Files' box.

Uploading Personal Files for Individual Travel Party Members

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > TRAVEL PARTY > click on next to the travel party Member you want to upload personal files for.
A 'Upload File: [Name]' window will appear.

Choose a file or drag-and-drop it inside (e.g., train tickets, passes, etc.).

Click UPLOAD to finish.
This file will be visible only to this specific person under EVENT OVERVIEW > 'Files for you' — a box that appears once a file has been uploaded for them.

vCard Download

A vCard button is displayed next to each travel party member, provided an email address or phone number is available and visibility permissions are met. This allows you to download the contact details (name, function, email, phone, company name) as a .vcf file and import them directly into your address book.

Mobile: Every person under PEOPLE has the same vCard button too: expand the entry – the button sits next to the email address, or next to the phone number if there is no address. It only appears where you can also see the person's contact details.

Uploading General Files in an Event

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > click on inside the 'Files' box.
A 'Upload File: [Event Date]' window will appear.

Choose a file or drag-and-drop it inside.

Choose who this file is visible to (by default, it will be visible to everyone).

Click UPLOAD to finish.
The file will now appear in the 'Files' box of the Event Overview for all users with permission to view it.

Note: If a file is uploaded for a specific functional category (e.g. Lighting, Sound), it will appear collapsed in the 'Files' box of all other crew members outside that function — keeping their view clean and uncluttered.

Sharing a File via Link

If someone without J.SHOW access needs a file from an event — the venue's technical team, the hotel or the driver, for example —, send them a link with an expiry date. Anyone with the link can open the file without logging in until it expires.

Desktop: Go to EVENTS > select the Event > in the 'Files' box, every row ends with a link icon. Click it.

Mobile: In the event view, the link icon sits in front of the file name in the files. In the app it may appear at the top of the file preview instead.

The “Share link” window opens and creates the link right away. Under Valid for, choose 1 day, 7 days (preselected) or 30 days; below it you can see until when the link works. Changing the duration creates a new link. Copy link puts it on your clipboard; on your phone, Share sends it straight through an app.

Anyone who can see the file in the event can share it — including files stored for all events or for all events of an event type that show up there. Once it has expired, the link no longer opens the file; if it's needed for longer, simply create a new one.

A link you have handed out cannot be withdrawn. So keep the duration as short as you need.

Uploading Personal Files as a Crew Member

Crew Members can only upload personal files in one place:

Go to DASHBOARD > click on inside the 'Personal Files' box.
A 'Upload File: [Name]' window will appear.

Choose a file or drag-and-drop it inside (e.g., passport copies.).

Click UPLOAD to finish.
The file will now be visible to the uploader in the 'Personal Files' box on their DASHBOARD.
For Admin, Agency, and Tourmanagement with the appropriate permission, these files will also be accessible under PEOPLE > FILES.

Multiple Dashboards

Alongside the central DASHBOARD with its conversation, event overview and personal files, you can create additional Dashboards — separate workspaces for teams, projects or specific topics. Each extra Dashboard has its own conversation, its own to-do list, its own note and as many custom fields as you need for text, files or people.

A tab bar at the top of the start page shows all visible Dashboards. The first tab Start always leads to the classic Dashboard. There, the 'What's new' box shows the latest changes to J.SHOW; scroll down inside it and older entries load automatically. At the top of the box you'll find the checkbox “Newsletter for software updates to …” with the address it goes to — the same checkbox as in your profile.

Note: New Dashboards can be created by Admin and Agency and, depending on the settings, also by Tourmanagement, Crew+ and Crew (see below). A Dashboard is visible to the selected permission levels, to the linked departments and to everyone who has been added as a member.

Create a Dashboard

To create a new Dashboard:

Desktop: In the tab bar at the top right, click + Dashboard. The New dashboard window opens.

Mobile: Swipe the tab bar left and tap + Dashboard at the end.

Enter a name in the Name field (e.g. “Production”, “Marketing”, “Tour 2026”); if you leave it empty, the Dashboard gets a numbered default name. Under Visible to you set Read and Write for each permission level — Admin, Agency, Tourmanagement and Artist are preset with write access, Crew+ with read access. Under Departments with access you can give access to entire departments (see Permissions). Create sets up the Dashboard and opens it. You can rename it at any time later via the pencil icon.

Note: Admins and the agency can always create Dashboards. For Tourmanagement, Crew+ and Crew there is one switch each under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS in the Dashboards box: Tourmanagement may create new dashboards, Crew+ may create new dashboards and Crew may create new dashboards. All three are switched on unless you switch them off. Whoever creates a Dashboard is always a member of it with write access.

A desk you have set up can be saved as a template and applied to a new one later, instead of creating the fields again every time. The button is called Save this dashboard as a template.

The template's fields are added along with their content, tasks and files; existing ones stay. Access settings are taken from the template. Not included: the conversation and deadlines that have already passed.

Note: A desk without any fields cannot be saved as a template — there would be nothing to carry over.

Fields & Content

Each additional Dashboard consists of the Conversation and any number of fields that you add yourself.

Built in:

Adding fields:

Click + Field — the new field appears straight away, with no further prompt. Every field holds all of this at once:

With + Partner you add a partner from the partner database as a ready-made field — with address and the contacts you select.

To change a field's name (e.g. “Briefing”, “Contracts”, “Venue contacts”), click the name at the top of the field. The ✕ in the field header deletes a field. Whoever created the Dashboard can reorder the fields via drag & drop using the handle to the left of the name.

Taking over a partner from the Partner Database:

Next to + Field, click + Partner. The Add partner window opens.

Type at least two characters into the search field (Name, city or type) and pick the partner from the results. Below it, the partner's contact persons appear, all ticked – untick the ones who should not go onto the field.

Click apply. J.SHOW creates a text field: the title is the partner's name with its type, the content is the partner's address, phone, email and website, followed by a separate block for each ticked contact person.

Note: The field is a copy. Later changes to the partner don't reach it, but you can freely add to the field. Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement see the button if they are allowed to edit the Dashboard; on an archived Dashboard it is missing.

Permissions

Who can see or edit a Dashboard is controlled on two levels: per Dashboard as a whole and additionally per field. So a “Contracts” field can be restricted to Admin and Agency while the conversation stays open to the whole team.

The Visible to controls let you decide, per permission level (Admin, Agency, Tourmanagement, Artist, Crew+, Crew, Guest):

Below the group-level settings you can add individual people and set their rights one by one — to grant access for someone on an otherwise restricted Dashboard, or to specifically exclude someone.

Users with read-only access see the Dashboard without edit icons, but can still check off to-dos and post in the conversation. Individual file fields can additionally be restricted per file — uploader and timestamp are recorded.

A Dashboard can also belong to entire departments, such as sound or lighting. Anyone whose profile has a function from one of the selected departments sees the Dashboard — including people who join later. If People from these departments may also edit is ticked, they may also write. You choose the departments when creating the Dashboard and change them later in the Visible to window under Departments with access. If only the departments should have access, untick the permission levels.

Live Collaboration

Dashboards update in the background while several people work at the same time. A presence bar at the top shows the initials of everyone currently viewing the Dashboard. Click on an initial to see the full name and which field that person is editing right now.

When someone is editing a text field, a subtle editing hint appears on that field — so you avoid overwriting each other by accident. Conversation and to-dos also update live, no need to refresh.

A new post in a Dashboard's conversation notifies everyone who may read the Dashboard — through their permission level, their department or as a member. Anyone who is excluded receives no notification.

Archiving

Once a Dashboard is no longer actively used, you can archive it — it disappears from the tab bar but all its content stays intact. Archived Dashboards show up at the bottom of the start Dashboard under Archived Dashboards. Click to open and use Restore from archive to bring it back.

To remove a Dashboard permanently, use Delete dashboard — this also removes all its fields, files, to-dos and conversation. Deletion has to be confirmed and cannot be undone.

Conversations

J.SHOW offers two ways to communicate directly with others on the Artist Platform:

General Conversation

To send general messages through the Platform:

Go to DASHBOARD > locate the 'General Conversation' box.

Click inside the box to begin typing. Once active, you'll see options for who to Notify with your message.

You can also tag specific people by typing @FirstNameLastName.

Click SEND to post your message.

It will appear below, along with the date and time it was sent.

Event-Specific Conversations

To send messages related to specific Events:

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > locate the 'Conversation' box.

Click inside the box to begin typing. Once active, you’ll see options to choose who to Notify with your message.

You can also tag specific people by typing @FirstNameLastName.

Click SEND to post your message.

It will then appear below, along with the date and time it was sent.

A summary of all Event-specific messages will also appear on the DASHBOARD in the 'Conversation' box — but only for users who have access to that Event.

Note: By default, Event-specific Conversation messages will notify all users in the Travel Party for that Event, as well as anyone with Admin or Agency permissions.
This can be customized under SETTINGS > NOTIFICATIONS, where the 'With new message in conversation of an Event' box allows you to define who should receive notifications:

You can now react to a single message and reply to it directly — in the event conversation, in the general conversation and on a Dashboard.

Reacting: A round smiley symbol with a plus sits under every message. Tap it to open the picker with six characters; tap again to close it. Your reaction then appears as a small chip under the message. If your character is already there, another tap takes it back.

Replying: Tapping Reply puts a strip Replying to above the input field, showing the beginning of the original message. Your reply then sits indented directly under that message, even if other people have written in the meantime. Replies to a reply stay flat in the same thread, so no nested levels build up.

Who hears about it: A reaction only reaches the person who wrote the message, and only if they have conversation notifications switched on and haven't muted the conversation for themselves. Reacting to your own message triggers nothing, and neither does taking a reaction back. The notification hub shows it either way, whether or not a push went to a phone.

Reactions belong to the message: delete it and they go with it. Tap a chip to see who reacted how.

Muting a conversation for yourself

If a conversation gets too noisy, you can mute it just for yourself – the conversation of a single event, of a Dashboard, or the general conversation on the DASHBOARD. Nobody else notices anything; for them everything stays as it was.

On the right of the header of the 'Conversation' or 'General Conversation' box there is a bell. Clicking it mutes the conversation: the bell is then crossed out, with Muted next to it. Another click switches the notifications back on.

Desktop, Mobile and App platform: The bell is in the same place everywhere – on the event in the 'Conversation' box, on a Dashboard in the header of the conversation.

While a conversation is muted, you get no push notification and no email for new messages there. You can still read and write, and new messages show up as unread as usual in the conversation and in the notification hub.

If someone mentions you with @FirstnameLastname, you are still notified – just like with the switches in your profile.

Conversation Notifications for Groups

When sending a message in the Conversation of an Event or in General Conversations, you can choose which group(s) should receive a notification:

@Mentions in Conversations

You can directly mention someone using @FirstnameLastname in the Event Conversation to make sure they get notified — even if:

@Mentions in Text Fields

Mentions don't only work in Conversations, but in practically every free-text field: Schedule 1–3, Other, Catering, Custom fields 1–3, Comment, Announcements, To-dos (on the Event and on a Dashboard) as well as in the fields of a Dashboard.

Type an @ and the same list of names appears as in the chat. Pick the person — the name is inserted as a single word, i.e. @FirstnameLastname.

Important: Only the single-word form counts. If you type @Firstname Lastname with a space by hand, no mention is created. Upper and lower case, on the other hand, make no difference.

The list appears in multi-line text fields. It is not available in single-line input fields.

Where the Mention Arrives

Whoever is mentioned finds it in the notification hub under You were mentioned — with a text excerpt around the spot, and a click that jumps straight into the right box of the Event.

When your own name appears as @FirstnameLastname in a text – in conversations, text fields, to-dos, on the Dashboard or in the notification hub – it is highlighted in color, so you can see at a glance where you are being addressed.

Unlike in the chat, there is deliberately no push notification and no email here. A schedule often gets tweaked ten times over an afternoon — that shouldn't set anyone's phone ringing. The mention sits quietly in the hub and waits there. In Conversations it stays as before: a mention there still triggers push and email.

Two more points, so nothing catches you out:

Only new names are reported. Anyone who was already in the text gets no second notice the next time you save. And whoever saves does not mention themselves.

Visibility applies. Anyone who is not allowed to see a field according to the visibility settings, or who cannot open the Event at all, is not addressed in it either — otherwise the preview would give away the content of a hidden field.

Notifications

There are many types of notifications in J.SHOW — from Event changes to messages, Crew Booking updates, reminders, and more. These can be triggered by the system, by other users, or by profile preferences.

Under SETTINGS > NOTIFICATIONS, Admins and Agency users can customize most default notifications on behalf of the team.

Note: If you're not logged into the App, you'll receive all notifications by email. Once logged in, they will be delivered as App Push notifications instead.

Profile Notification Settings

In your personal Profile, you can toggle whether you want to receive notifications for:

Since August 2026 there are more switches there — and email and app push can be decided separately. The two columns sit side by side in a table: a tick on the left controls the email, one on the right the push. Before, both hung on a single switch, so anyone who wanted fewer emails lost the push as well.

Desktop and mobile: open your profile and click 'Notifications via email or App-Push'. The settings now live in a window of their own instead of in the middle of the profile form.

App platform: tap the menu — Notifications is a card of its own there, between the accounts and 'Subscribe to the calendar'. It applies to all your accounts at once.

You can decide separately about:

Admins and agency users find a second block below it, Notifications for management — messages that are not about you but about something someone else did (for example 'when someone submits their availability').

If the app is not logged in on any of your devices, inactive appears above the push column and its ticks are grayed out. Your saved settings are kept — as soon as you log in to the app, they apply again.
If the app is logged in on your phone but notifications for J.SHOW are switched off there, this is shown below the table. Allow them in your phone's settings and then reopen the app once — until then these messages arrive by email.

'Booking protection' is not in this window but in your profile, right below 'use crewbooking tool' — see Providing Availability via Crewbooking Tool.

Note: Even if a person disables message notifications, they will still be notified when mentioned by @FirstnameLastname.

Note: For a detailed breakdown of Profile Setting notifications, please refer to the User Profile section.

These toggles control whether you get a push notification or an email — not whether the information is created in the first place. It appears in the notification hub either way. So you don't miss out on anything; you only decide how loud it should be.

Less Urgent Notifications

Less urgent notifications are typically sent by email and include:

Urgent Notifications

Urgent notifications are sent via App Push. If the user isn’t logged into the App or has switched off the app's notifications on their phone, the system falls back to email. Urgent cases include:

Notification Hub

The notification hub is where everything that is waiting for you comes together: due to-dos, contracts, settlements, open invoices, guest list requests, unanswered conditions, unread messages, and everything that has gone out to you by push or email. Instead of clicking through every Event one by one, you see at a glance what is still open.

What makes it special: the hub collects across all Platforms you have access to — your own, your other accounts and, if you work for an agency, its artists. Whether you log in on the Artist Platform, the Agency Platform or in the App: you see the same set everywhere.

Where to Find It

Three round buttons sit side by side in the bottom right corner. From left to right they are: Notification hub (bell), global search (magnifier) and Kira (question mark).

Artist Platform (desktop and mobile): Click the bell — the panel slides in from the right.

Agency Platform: The same bell in the same place.

App: Also in the bottom right corner, in both the desktop and the mobile view.

If the bell carries a red dot with a number, something urgent is waiting: overdue deadlines, items due today, and mentions. This also includes everything that has gone out to you by push or email. Hidden and already read entries are not counted. If nothing is open, the panel reports Nothing open – all clear. In the current app for Android, iPhone and iPad the same number also appears on the app icon — on Android provided your home screen shows numbers on app icons, on iPhone and iPad provided you have allowed the app to send notifications. Once everything has been read, the Android app's notifications also disappear from your phone's notification shade.

Note for the mobile view: On a phone, the hub only shows what can actually be opened on mobile. Contracts, settlements, open settlement items, invoices and venue avails do not appear there — for those topics, switch to the desktop.

How the Panel Is Structured

At the top there are topic tabs: ALL, MESSAGES, NOTIFICATIONS, TO-DO, CONTRACT, GUEST LIST, VENUE AVAILS, CONDITIONS, SETTLEMENT and INVOICES. Tabs without entries are not shown at all. The hub remembers which tab was open last.

Below that you can narrow things down further:

Urgency: unread, overdue, due today, coming up and no deadline — each with a colored dot and a count.

Artists: If you look after several Platforms, chips with the artist names appear. On an Artist Platform that artist is preselected; in the agency and in the App the selection is set to All.

Platforms: The header shows Platforms with a count such as "3/5" — on a phone only the count, to save space. There you can switch individual Platforms off entirely — deselected ones are not even queried any more. Your own Platform cannot be deselected.

The Platform selection applies jointly to the notification hub and the global search, and it does so across the Artist Platform, the Agency Platform and the App. You set it once and it takes effect everywhere.

What the Hub Collects

Deadlines appear 14 days in advance, Event-related entries without a deadline of their own 45 days before the Event. Entries never expire by themselves — they disappear once the matter is settled.

The “Notifications” Tab

Everything that reached you by push or email is listed here as well — so nothing gets lost if you swiped a message away on your phone. This includes, among others: a new Event, a short-notice Event change, a status change, a deleted Event, your booking for an Event or its cancellation, changed availabilities, confirmed, declined or changed guest list requests, new conditions and the replies to them, completed to-dos and to-dos assigned to you, new messages in the general Conversation, on a Dashboard and on the contract, as well as venue suggestions and availability confirmations.

An entry disappears as soon as you open the place it belongs to — or when you click it directly in the hub. After that it remains available for 30 days under Show read at the bottom edge. Unread entries never expire.

What does not end up in this tab: password emails, email confirmations, anything to do with subscription, trial and PRO, and mass emails to guests. Nor things that already have their own area in the hub — a guest list request is listed under GUEST LIST, not a second time here.

The toggles in your Profile (“Changes to Events happening today or tomorrow”, “Messages in Conversations”) control push and email. The line in the notification hub is created regardless. So you still get the information — just quietly, in one place, instead of on your phone.

Handle Things Straight from the Line

A lot of it you don't even have to open:

This works for Events on other Platforms too — your rights there are checked again with every click. Completed items stay in place with a strikethrough until the next load, so you can see what you have just worked through.

In the App the same direct actions are available — with one exception: invoices and advance invoices cannot be changed there.

Hiding Entries

Anything you're not interested in right now can be hidden with the X at the right edge of the line. If there is more than one entry under a heading, Hide all clears the whole group in one go.

At the bottom edge you get them back with Show hidden (N); clicking the restore arrow in the line brings that single entry back.

What you hide is always the current state of a matter, not the matter forever. If you move a payment term or a due date changes, the entry reports back — so you don't miss anything just because you clicked it away once.

Reach and Permissions

The hub draws its Platforms from four sources: the same email address on other Platforms, your other accounts, an agency login, and your work as a member of an agency.

Only the overview is combined, not the permissions. What you can see and do on a Platform is still decided solely by your Profile there — checked afresh with every request. Anyone who is a guest on a Platform stays a guest there, even if they are an admin on their own Platform.

Clicking an entry from another Platform takes you straight there — logged in, without having to log in again.

Global Search

The global search finds everything in your data from a single field: Events, venues, partners, contacts, accommodations, people, guest list entries, Dashboards, as well as notes and texts. And it doesn't only search the Platform you happen to be on, but all the ones you have access to.

Opening the Search

The magnifier button sits in the bottom right corner, in the middle between the notification hub and Kira. The search window opens in the center of the screen, with the cursor already in the field.

On a computer: Also by keystroke — S opens the search, Cmd/Ctrl + K opens and closes it (in the App only S). While you are typing in an input field, the keys do nothing.

On a phone: via the button. There are no keyboard shortcuts there.

Close it with Esc, by clicking next to the window, or with the shortcut again.

What Gets Found

J.SHOW starts searching from the second character. The results are grouped by type, in a fixed order:

Several words are combined with AND. For notes & texts, what is on the related event also counts – title, venue, city and the year: “soundcheck paris” finds the soundcheck line in the schedule of the Paris event. At least one of the words has to be in the text itself. If the artist name is part of your search term, it is automatically ignored on that artist's own Platform — so “jolle berlin” only searches for “berlin” there.

Mentions are found in both spellings: @FirstnameLastname and Firstname Lastname both lead to the same spot.

Not searched are files and documents, songs and setlists, contracts, settlements and invoices, as well as venue avails.

Working with the Results

Each line shows the title, for Events the artist, and underneath the date, city and venue. If phone numbers or email addresses are stored, they appear on the right as small buttons — one click dials or writes directly, without leaving the search.

Use the arrow keys to move through the list, Enter opens the highlighted result. With nothing selected, Enter opens the first one. If a result is on another Platform, one click takes you there logged in.

If the search finds nothing, it simply says No results. There are deliberately no filters — just type one more word instead.

On a phone, master data forms and person Profiles cannot be jumped to directly; those lines are not clickable. The phone and email buttons work all the same.

Reach

The search uses the same reach and the same Platform selection as the notification hub. So whatever you deselect there in the header under Platforms is not searched either. That is why there is no separate selection in the search window.

Here too: your permission level is checked separately for each Platform. You only find what you are allowed to see there.

In the agency, the search additionally covers the Dashboards of the Artist Platforms you look after. The agency's own master data appears only once, and not again for every artist.

Calendar Subscription

Important — the address of your calendar subscription has changed.
Until August 2026 a subscription address could be calculated. A calendar subscription has no login — the address is the entire protection, and an address anyone can work out protects nothing. Every subscription therefore has a random address now.

What to do: Copy the address in the 'Subscribe to the calendar' box again and set the subscription up once more in your calendar app. Existing subscriptions keep delivering dates until 1 December 2026. After that an all-day entry '⚠ Calendar subscription out of date — please set it up again' takes their place: your calendar will show you that something needs doing — but no more dates will arrive.

Until then, an old subscription already shows an all-day entry '⚠ Calendar subscription: please set it up again by 1 December' next to your dates – with the same instructions.

There are four different types of Calendar Subscriptions available in J.SHOW — each with a unique .ics link:

Universal Calendar Link (All Platforms)

Shows all Events you've been booked for across all Artist Platforms associated with the email address you're logged in with.

Artist Platform Link (Personal)

Shows only the Events you've been booked for on this specific Artist Platform.

Artist Platform Link (All Visible Events)

Shows all Events you have access to on this specific Platform — even if you're not yet booked.

To subscribe to any of the above Calendars:

Go to DASHBOARD and locate the ‘Subscribe to the calendar’ box.
Click COPY URL TO CLIPBOARD to copy the Calendar-specific .ics link.

You can paste this link into your preferred calendar application (Google Calendar, Apple Calendar, etc.). This will create a live subscription, keeping your calendar up-to-date as changes are made in J.SHOW.

Note: If needed, refer to your calendar app’s help section for how to subscribe to external calendars using a URL.

Agency Platform Link

Under SETTINGS > GENERAL, you can subscribe to all Events across all Artist Platforms linked to the Agency. With Include the artists' blocks in this calendar subscription in the 'Subscribe to the calendar' box, the artists’ blocks (e.g. holidays or studio time) are added to the subscription as all-day entries, with the artist’s abbreviation in front. The option is off by default, applies to everyone subscribed to this address, and only admins can set it.

Add to Apple Calendar on Mac:

Open the Calendar app on your Mac.

In the menu bar, click File > New Calendar Subscription.

Paste the copied .ics link and click Subscribe.

Adjust settings if desired (e.g. auto-refresh), then click OK.

Add to Apple Calendar on iPhone:

Log in to the J.SHOW App.

Open the menu, expand 'Subscribe to the calendar' and click SUBSCRIBE.
Your iPhone asks whether you want to subscribe to the calendar and shows the subscription URL.

Click on Subscribe again to finish.

Add to Google Calendar:

Go to Google Calendar in a browser.

On the left side, click the + next to Other calendars and choose From URL.

Paste the .ics link and click Add calendar.

Note: You must be logged into your Google Account for this to work.

Tip: The calendar is read-only — any updates on the Platform will automatically sync to your calendar based on refresh settings.

Note: You will find the schedule of each Event inside the Notes of the respective Calendar Entry.

Not every event has to end up in your calendar. Events with certain statuses can be kept out of the subscription — usually Idea and Option, which only take up space as long as nothing is agreed.

Your own subscription: the setting is called Do not add events with this status to my calendar subscription.

An address several people subscribe to: there it reads Do not add events with this status to this calendar subscription (applies to everyone subscribed to this address) — the choice then applies to everyone using that address.

Crew-Specific Calendar Feed

Each crew member automatically receives a personal calendar feed that contains only the Events they are booked for. This feed is generated individually per user and updates automatically as travel party assignments change.

The crew calendar feed includes:

Note: The crew calendar is a personal link — do not share it, as it provides access to your individual schedule.

Add dates you are not booked on to your calendar subscription

Not booked on a date yet, but you already know it is going to happen? You can still add it to your personal calendar subscription.

Open the date and activate the checkbox ‘Event in my subscribed calendar’. It only appears on future dates you are not booked on.

If the crewbooking tool is active for you, this can also happen automatically:

All future dates where you selected ‘I am available’ are added to your calendar subscription automatically — the option ‘Automatically add events marked “I am available” to my calendar subscription’ is enabled by default. You can switch it off at any time in the ‘Subscribe to the calendar’ box on the DASHBOARD. In the app you'll find the same setting in the menu next to your personal calendar subscription — there it applies to all platforms of your profile.

App platform: The option is also available in the app: below ‘logged in as’, tap Subscribe to the calendar. The checkbox ‘Automatically add events marked “I am available” to my calendar subscription (all platforms)’ applies to all platforms of your profile at once.

Note: These entries are marked as tentative in your calendar and carry the addition ‘(not booked)’ in the title. As soon as you actually get booked, the entry automatically turns into a regular, confirmed calendar event.

Guest lists and Backstage Access

From last-minute +1s to full backstage chaos control — master, manage, and customize your Guest list like a pro with J.SHOW.

Note: The GUEST LIST tab within an 'Event Overview' will not appear for non-performance days such as Travel, Set Up, Tear Down, or Off Days.

As the contact person, the guest list now names the person who is listed in the travel party of this event with tour management as their active function. Anyone who merely carries that function in general, but is not assigned on that day, no longer appears.

Adding Guests to an Event

To add people to the Guest list of an Event:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS

Go to GUEST LIST > + ADD
An 'Add' window will appear.

Fill in relevant information such as first name, last name, invited by, etc.

Note: If Guest list Pass Options (SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS) have been enabled, you will also be able to specify the number of Aftershow, Backstage, and/or Photo Passes.

Click ADD.
The Guest will now appear in the guest list.

Underneath the name in the Invited by column you will now find a smaller, paler line telling you who created the entry, labelled Added by. The value comes from the account that was logged in at the time and cannot be changed.

The two answer different questions: Invited by is a free text field and says on whose invitation the guest is coming. Added by says who wrote them into the list.

When both are the same person the second line is left out, because the same name would otherwise sit twice under one another. The information appears in all three views: the table on desktop, the list on your phone and the CSV export, where it is a column of its own.

Guest list Requests

By default, Artists and Crew+ can add and edit Guests.
People with Crew and Guest permission have no Guest list permissions.

To allow Artists and Crew+ to submit Guest requests only:

Go to SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS.

In the 'Add & edit guest list' box, select that Artists and Crew+ are allowed to 'request only'

To allow people with Crew and Guest permission to submit Guest requests:

Go to SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS.

In the 'Add & edit guest list' box, check "Crew and Guest are allowed to request"

To make a Guest request:

Go to the respective Event Overview > GUEST LIST > + ADD
A 'Make a Request' window will appear.

Fill out First and Last Name, number of tickets, and an optional comment.

Click ADD to finish.
You will see a note that the request was sent and will be reviewed by an Admin.
Once someone reacts, you'll receive an email notification.
The requested name will appear in orange italics in the guest list.
Once approved, the name will appear in normal formatting.

Note: You can edit a Guest request even after it has been submitted.

To approve or decline a request:

Go to the respective Event Overview > GUEST LIST
You will see a and next to each request.

Click to approve a request
Click to decline — a prompt will appear to add a reason (optional)

Guest list Settings

There are a couple of different places to tweak and refine Guest list Settings and permissions.

➀ In the Event Overview, go to GUEST LIST > SETTINGS to edit settings within a specific Event.
A 'Settings' window will appear.

In the Limit box, indicate the total number of Guest Tickets available and set limits per person or per entry.

In the GL Pass Options box, select which pass types are available for Guests.

In the Field for email address box, choose whether Guest emails are optional or mandatory, and whether they should be printed on the Guest list.

In the Custom field for each entry box, create a custom field to be filled out when adding a Guest to the list.

In the Areas box, define spatial areas such as hall, box, or balcony — see Guest list areas.

At the very top of the window, 'There is no guest list for this event' lets you explicitly mark the Event as having no Guest list — for a private event, for example. That makes clear that no guests are planned, rather than that nobody has been added yet. The mark applies to the whole Event, including its additional lists. It can only be set while the Guest list is empty; otherwise the checkbox is grayed out and you need to remove all entries first.

Instead of the list, the note There is no guest list for this event is then shown — on desktop, on mobile, in the offline view and in the shared link. Adding guests, additional lists, moving, locking, CSV, PDF and sending are no longer offered. Click 'Re-enable guest list' right below the note (or untick the box in the Settings) to lift the mark at any time.

Mobile: You'll find the checkbox under GUEST LIST > SETTINGS in the Guest list box.

The mark can be set and lifted by the same permission levels that can lock and unlock the Guest list: Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement (for their own Events, or when Tourmanagement may edit all Events).

Here, you can also add another Guest list by clicking + ANOTHER LIST.
A new 'Settings' window will appear, with an additional 'Label' box that allows you to name the new Guest list.

Note: The visibility of a Guest list can only be edited for additional GLs.

Note: Once at least one additional Guest list exists, the original Guest list can also be renamed.

Note: If an Event has several guest lists, Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement also see All guest lists for this event below the ticket count of the open list — the total across all lists, e.g. “27 tickets + 5 tickets pending”. This works on desktop and mobile. Open requests only count on lists that are not locked.

Click to close the window. All changes will be applied automatically.

➁ Go to SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS for more advanced Settings that affect all Guest lists.

Mobile: Tap the hamburger menu in the top right corner, then Settings, and choose GUEST LISTS — see Settings on your phone.

In the General box, you can:

Deactivate the Guest list completely.

Enable the "Comment" field.

Enable the "Access" field.

Enforce First and Last Name (if unchecked, it is sufficient to enter either first name, last name, or company name).

In the Add & edit guest list box, choose whether Artist and Crew+ can add and edit or request only.
You can also decide whether "Crew" and "Guest" are allowed to request.

Tourmanagement may change this box too. Apart from it, Tourmanagement only sees the PDF boxes here; all other boxes remain reserved for Admin and Agency.

In the Aftershow / Backstage / Photo box, specify whether users who can only submit requests are still allowed to register for Aftershow, Backstage, or Photo passes.
Also, Select which GL Pass Options are available (Aftershow, Backstage, Photo, or custom).

In the Visibility of Guest list box, decide whether the complete Guest list is visible to:

Everyone / Admin, Agency, Tour Manager, and Artist / Only users with edit permission

In the Email notification for guest list requests box, click + ADD PERSON to notify one or more people whenever guest list requests are made.

In the Email notification for new guest list entries box you decide who hears about it when someone else adds a guest directly to the guest list (not as a request). Click + ADD PERSON and pick the people; ✕ removes someone again.

You can choose anyone who may edit every guest list on the platform: Admin, Agency and – if Tourmanagement may edit all Events – Tourmanagement.

New guests are collected into one email per Event, sent once nobody has added anything there for 10 minutes. Nobody is notified about their own entries. Entries from desktop, mobile, the app and the AI assistant all count. Entries on an additional list with restricted visibility only reach people who may see that list.

If the box is empty, nobody is notified. The notification is sent by email only.

In the Limit box, define whether a Guest list limit set in a specific Event should also restrict Admin and/or also restrict Agency. This applies to the overall limit and to the quota per area alike.

In the Price categories box, choose whether to:

Not use price categories

Use price categories from the Template

Use price categories from the Event

In the Layout PDF box, configure the layout of the final Guest list printout and define which information should be included.

On top of the overall limit you can set a separate maximum for each access type — ten aftershow passes and five for the photo pit, for example. The field sits in the event's settings window right next to the pass type. Leave it empty and that type has no limit. Every additional guest list keeps its own maxima.

With the setting Price category required when adding entries PRO a price category has to be chosen whenever a guest is added, so no ticket is left unassigned. Note: The requirement only applies where price categories are in use at all — and it does not apply to permission levels that never get to see them.

Guest list areas (hall, box, balcony …)

Areas let you split the guest list spatially — independent of the price categories and at no extra cost: the feature is available on all platforms.

In the Event Overview, open GUEST LIST > SETTINGS. In the Areas box, create new areas via the add area input and +, rename existing ones directly in the text field, or remove them with .

To the right of each area you can set a quota (tickets) — per area and guest list. The quota works just like the overall limit when someone adds an entry: once an area is picked, the Tickets field only allows as many spots as are still free in that area. Only Admin and Agency can still enter more by default — unless also restrict Admin or also restrict Agency is set in the Limit box under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS. Their overage is shown in red in the occupancy overview below the list. Entries without an area are also allowed — unless you make the area required (see below).

When adding a guest, pick the area via the Area dropdown — optionally combined with a price category; the ticket limit is then the minimum of the free spots of both selections.

If every entry should be assigned to an area, enable Area required when adding entries in the Areas box. The setting applies per list — separately for the main list and each additional guest list.
Area then becomes a required field when adding or editing an entry: the selection is not preset, and nothing is saved without an area — the field is then outlined in red. This applies on desktop, on mobile, and to entries made via the app and the AI assistant.

Note: The requirement only applies while the event has at least one area. Existing entries without an area are only affected the next time they are edited.

As soon as areas exist, the Area column appears in the guest list table, in the CSV export, and on the printout; the occupancy By area is shown below the list as well. In the mobile view, the area is displayed directly on the entry.

Tip: Areas you need for many Events can be set up once under TEMPLATES > GUEST LIST — see Guest list template.

Locking the guest list and exporting it as PDF

Before you print the guest list, export it as CSV or send it, it gets locked. A locked list takes no new entries and no requests — from anyone, including the app and the AI assistant. Clicking + ADD anyway only shows the note The guest list is locked.

Desktop: In the Event Overview, click LOCK under GUEST LIST. If you click CSV or PDF while the list is still open, you first see the note The guest list must be locked in advance with the button LOCK NOW.

Once the list is locked, PDF first opens the Guest list preview window. Check the printout there; only the PDF button in the top right of the window bar creates the PDF file. If Print guest list in landscape format is enabled under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS, the window opens wider.

Next to the PDF button in the window bar you choose the language of the printout. The platform language is preselected, not your profile language — after all, the list goes to the venue. The CSV file uses the same choice; it is not saved. On mobile and when sending, the list always comes in the platform language.

Mobile: For Events from today onwards, lock, send and PDF sit above the guest list. Tapping PDF while the list is open shows a note that the list will be locked; after you confirm, the PDF opens directly — there is no preview on mobile.

UNLOCK opens the list for new entries again.

Locking and unlocking is available to Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement (for their own Events, or when Tourmanagement may edit all Events). Every additional guest list is locked on its own.

Door Counter on Show Day

On the day of the show, the Guest list turns into a check-in list: you tick off arriving guests right there and keep a real-time overview of who's already in.

Requirement: The door counter only appears when today is the show day and the Guest list is closed (lock icon). Before that, and on any other day, you see the Guest list as usual without the counter.

Mobile: Open the Event's Guest list. A checkbox appears in front of each entry. If the entry has exactly one ticket and no passes, one tap checks it off (a second tap undoes it). For multiple seats or additional passes, the 'How many to check off now?' window opens.

App platform: The app takes you into the same mobile Guest list on your phone — the door counter works there identically.

Desktop: The door counter also works in the desktop Guest list — a checkbox appears in front of each entry under the same conditions (show day, Guest list closed), with the same window.

How many are already in? On the show day, the top of the list shows for each category how many seats have been checked off — e.g. Tickets: 23 of 58 checked off, followed by the same figure for every pass in use. Seats are counted, not entries: an entry with four tickets counts as four. Open requests are not counted. The figure updates with every tick right away — even offline — and picks up ticks set on another device.

Desktop: The counter sits above the table.

Mobile: The counter sits at the top, below the list title — also in the check-in link without login.

In the 'How many to check off now?' window, you enter how many people are coming in right now — not how many are in altogether. That way nobody has to do the maths at the second check-in, possibly on another device:

For each category (Tickets, Aftershow, Backstage, Photo and a custom category, if set up) the current status is shown at the top, e.g. 1 of 2 checked off. Below it you tap the number — only numbers up to the remaining seats are offered, and nothing is preselected. Once everything is checked off, it reads All checked off.

If only one category still has open seats, a single tap on the number is enough: it is checked off immediately and the window closes. With several categories, first pick the number in each, then confirm with 'Check off'. Tapping the same number again clears the selection.

If more than ten seats are open in a category, choose the number with −/+ and confirm with 'Check off'.

Checked off too many by mistake? Use '−1' next to the status to take back one seat of that category.

Several people checking in at once: The status updates automatically. When multiple people work the door in parallel, everyone sees the current count — without reloading the page.
Works offline: The doors counter keeps working without internet — e.g. in a dead spot at the door. Check-ins are saved locally and sent automatically once the connection is back. A status pill shows Saved offline or Synced; the queue even survives reloading the page or restarting the app.

Check-in link without login: You can also let people without a J.SHOW account handle the door. Share the encrypted link to the Event and release the Guest list category in it. That link lets anyone check guests in on the show day — no login required.

Mass Email

The mass email feature allows you to contact all guests on a guest list at once via email. This feature is available on Desktop under GUEST LIST > MAIL TO EVERYONE and is only visible to Admin, Agency and TM users.

Enter a Subject and Message. Text can be formatted with bold, italic, underline and line breaks.

Use the {NAME} placeholder in the subject or message body to automatically address each recipient by name.

Attachments: You can upload general attachments that are sent to all recipients. Additionally, individual attachments per recipient can be uploaded directly in the guest list table.

General attachments stay in the window after sending and go out to every recipient again with the next mass email. So that you don't miss them, they are shown large and bold with a paperclip, and the confirmation before sending lists them once more (“General attachments – sent to every recipient”). Remove anything that should not go out again beforehand with the red ✕ next to it.

Below the message you see the recipients, each with a checkbox — all of them ticked to begin with. Use Select all / Deselect all or the individual checkboxes to send the email to only part of the guest list. Underneath, you can see how many are selected, e.g. “3 of 12 selected”.

Click SEND TEST EMAIL to send a test message to your own address.

Click SEND EMAIL TO ALL to start the send process. If not everyone is ticked, the button reads “Send to 3 Selected” and sends the email to them only; if nobody is selected, it cannot be clicked. A progress bar shows the status.

The Send History shows all previous mass emails with date, subject, sender, number of recipients, number of errors, and number of attachments. Only the guests the email actually went to count as recipients.

To Do Lists

Every Event has its own dedicated To Do List. You can create and manage To-Dos directly within each Event — go to the 'To Do' box in the respective Event Overview to add tasks, create reminders, and track progress.

Note: By default, To Do Lists are private to the creator and only available to users with a registered Profile.
Only Admin and Agency users can choose to make To-Do Items visible to other Admins or Agency users.

However, visibility can also be enabled for users with Tourmanagement permission under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS, by checking 'Tourmanagement may see and edit the Admin & Agency to-dos'.

Adding To Do Items to an Event

To add To Do Items in the Event Overview:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the To-do box.

Choose whether the To Do item should be 'visible for Admin & Agency' or 'only visible for you'.

Note: Without Admin or Agency permissions, this option is not visible, as you can only create To Do items for yourself.

Enter your task in the What’s to do? field and, optionally, choose a Deadline.

Deadline

Once the To Do item is overdue, it will be highlighted in red in both your Dashboard and the Event Overview To Do boxes. A will also appear next to the Event in the event list.

Reminder

To add a personalized Reminder to your To Do items:

In the 'To Do' window, click on ADD under 'Reminder via Email Notification & Calendar Entry'.
A 'To Do Email Notification & Calendar Entry' window will appear.

Click ADD PERSON and select the person(s) to be reminded from the list. This will also make the Reminder appear in each person’s subscribed calendar.

Then, optionally, set a Deadline for each To Do item and add as many reminders before and after as needed (e.g. 20 days before, 7 days before, 2 days before, 3 days after, etc.).
From the day of the reminder, J.SHOW sends it every day until the task is done.

All due tasks of a person arrive in one daily email. If a task has several reminders, it still appears there only once.

Important: If no Deadline is set, reminders will automatically orient toward the Event Date.

To mark a task as complete, check the box next to the item in the To-do box in the Event Overview.

To edit a task, click the icon next to the item in the To-do box in the Event Overview.

To remove the deadline from a To Do item, click the next to the deadline inside the respective To Do item window.

To 'Notify' a specific person once the To Do item is completed, click ADD and select the relevant person from the list.

Responsible People

A To Do item can be assigned to one or more responsible people. That way everyone can see at a glance who is taking care of a task — and the person is notified without you having to write to them separately.

Open the 'To Do' window (new or existing item) and type a name into the 'Responsible' field right below the deadline. Matching people are suggested; one click adds them. You can add as many people as you like and remove them again with the ✕ on their tag.

Desktop: in the To Do window of the Event Overview and in the focus view.

Mobile and App platform: in the to-do form of the mobile Event view.

Dashboard: To Do items on a Dashboard and in its fields have the 'Responsible' field as well.

Who can assign: on an Event, everyone who manages general To Do items — Admin, Agency and, if enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS, Tourmanagement. On a Dashboard, everyone with write access.
Who can be assigned: everyone who is allowed to see the Event or the Dashboard — except guests. A To Do item that is 'only visible for you' cannot be assigned to anyone.

Responsible people see the To Do item even if their permission level would not normally show general To Do items, and they can check it off. Editing and deleting stays with those who could do so before. In every list, a bold line Responsible: with the names appears below the text and the deadline — your own name is highlighted in color. If you assign someone who would not otherwise see the item, the note 'also visible to:' with their names appears below the visibility option.

What the responsible person receives:

If you assign yourself, nobody is notified. Whoever assigns is automatically added under 'Notify When the Task Is Completed' and learns when the task has been checked off (only with a personal profile).

Important: Being responsible does not replace a reminder. Anyone who should be reminded of a deadline or have the item in their subscribed calendar still needs to be added under 'Reminder via Email Notification & Calendar Entry'.

Note: The assignment email and push follow the same personal switches as the deadline reminders ('when a to-do deadline is approaching', see the Profile section). The Notification hub entry is always created.

Dashboard: in the 'To-dos in events' box you can switch between 'show all' · 'assigned to me'. The filter appears as soon as at least one open item is assigned to you and you see general To Do items anyway.

Creating To Do Templates

With To Do Templates, you can create fully structured task lists — complete with deadlines and personalized reminders — and instantly apply them to any Event. Since many tasks repeat across shows and rarely change, this feature lets you reuse your standard workflow with ease, ensuring that every step is covered and every responsible person stays notified — every time.

To add items to the 'To Do' Template box:

Go to TEMPLATES > OVERVIEW.

Select the relevant general Template or create a new one by clicking + NEW TEMPLATE.

Click the inside the To-do box.
A 'To Do' window will appear.

Choose whether the To Do item will be 'visible for Admin & Agency' or 'only visible for you' (this option is only available for Admin / Agency / Tourmanagement with permission).

Name the To Do item in the What's to do? field.

Set a Deadline by indicating how many days before or after the Event this task should be completed.

To send email reminders, click ADD under 'Reminder via Email Notification & Calendar Entry'.
A 'To Do Email Notification & Calendar Entry' window will appear.

Click ADD PERSON and select the person(s) to be reminded from the list.
Then set a Deadline for each To Do item and add as many reminders before and after as needed.

Click SAVE to return to the 'To Do' window.

To notify specific people when the task is completed, click ADD under 'Notify When the Task Is Completed'.

Click SAVE to finish.

Responsible people in templates: In a template's 'To Do' window you can also add people in the 'Responsible' field below the deadline. Nobody is notified inside the template itself — the notification goes out only when the template is applied to an Event. Copying or duplicating an Event also carries the responsible people over.

Applying To Do Templates

To apply a To Do Template to relevant Events, you have two options:

➀ Go to TEMPLATES > OVERVIEW > Choose Event Overview Template > click APPLY TO EVENTS.

Check 'To Do' to apply this category (and any others) to the Events in question.

Click on SELECT EVENTS.

Check all relevant Events in the event list.

Click on APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS.

➁ Go to EVENTS > choose the relevant Event from the event list.

Go to OVERVIEW > TEMPLATE.

Choose the Event Overview Template that contains the To Do List you want to apply to this Event.

Check 'To Do' to apply this category (and any others) to the Event.

Click APPLY to finish.

Private Notes

Private Notes are only available to users with a registered Profile.
If you are logged in via an Agency account (without a personal profile), any text entered in the Private Note box (in the Event Overview) will be visible to all Agency employees — since there's no individual user to associate privacy with.

Note for the Agency

If the artist platform belongs to an agency and you are logged in with your own profile whose email address also has an employee account at the agency, the Private Note window shows two fields:

Both texts then appear one below the other in the Private Note box. People who only work on the artist platform and have no access to the agency do not see the shared note.
If you open the event via the agency platform and have no own profile on the artist platform, there is only the shared field. If you do have an own profile there with the same email address as your employee account (or you own the agency), you are also logged in with that profile when you switch over from the agency platform and see both fields.

Adding Private Notes

To add a Private Note inside an Event:

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > OVERVIEW

Click the icon inside the Private Note box.

You can now add your personal note — visible only to you (if logged in through your own registered profile).

Note: For formatting options, refer to the Formatting a Textbox section.

Song Pools and Setlists

Creating the perfect Setlist has never been this easy.
With J.SHOW, you can effortlessly pool songs, drag and drop your favorites, and build show-ready Setlists in just a few clicks.

Note: The Setlist box within an 'Event Overview' is only available for Events that take place on show days. It will not appear for non-performance days such as Travel, Set Up, Tear Down, or Off Days.

Creating a Song Pool

First, add any 'Custom Fields' that matter to you when entering songs into your Song Pool. These specialized tags help your crew prepare for all show-specific elements.

To add Custom Fields:

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST.

Click the + inside the Custom Fields box.

Alternatively: In a specific Event, click the icon in the 'Setlist' box, then click the icon inside the Custom Fields box of the 'Edit Setlist' window.

A 'Create Field' window will appear.

Enter a Name (e.g. "BPM", "Lighting Mood") and click SAVE.
Your new Field will now be available in the 'Create Song' window, as well as in the Formatting Templates.

Then, create a Song Pool for your Artist Platform to use across all Setlist Templates.

To add entries to the Song Database:

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST.

Click the + inside the Songs box.

Alternatively: In a specific Event, click the icon in the 'Setlist' box, then click the icon inside the Songs box of the 'Edit Setlist' window.

A 'Create Song' window will appear with standard fields (Title, Duration, Composition Number, Composer, Note) and any added custom categories.

If GEMA Fields are enabled under SETTINGS > PLATFORM, the song window has a GEMA section. There you can enter a different “Title for GEMA” — e.g. the registered work title if you call the song something else internally. Both GEMA exports then use this title; the setlist, print and CSV keep the song title. If the field is empty, the song title is used.

Fill in all relevant information and click SAVE.

Repeat these steps to build your full Song Pool.

Adding Other Show Segments

You can also add Announcements, Cues, or any special Show Segments — such as intro text, a dance interlude, or a short film. If these include a Duration, they’ll be factored into the Total Show Time Calculation at the bottom of your Setlist.

To add a Show Segment to the Pool:

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST.
Click the + icon in the Announcement / Note box.
Alternatively: In a specific Event, click the icon in the 'Setlist' box, then click the icon inside the Announcement / Note box of the 'Edit Setlist' window.

A 'Create Announcement / Note' window will appear.
Enter a Name (e.g. "Announcement", "Break").
Then enter the Duration, note text, or any relevant custom fields, and click SAVE.
The new segment will now appear in your Notes box.

Note: All changes to Songs in the Database are applied globally across all Setlists where they’re used.

Building and Customizing a Setlist

To create a Setlist for a Show:

Select the relevant Event from the event list under EVENTS > OVERVIEW.

Click the icon inside the Setlist box.
An 'Edit Setlist' window will appear.

You can either (1) manually add Songs and Announcements / Show Segments from the Song Pool, or
(2) click COPY FROM TEMPLATE to apply a pre-saved Setlist Template to the Event.
Changes are saved automatically.

To manually add Songs and Announcements / Show Segments from the pool:

Click the next to the desired song to append it to the end of the Setlist box.

Or: grab the icon and drag & drop it to the exact spot you want in the Setlist — the entry lands right there instead of only at the end. Drag near the top or bottom edge and the list scrolls along automatically.

Use to change the order of songs.
Use to remove a song.

To save this Setlist for future use, click SAVE AS TEMPLATE.

Creating, editing and deleting Songs, Announcements, custom fields and Formatting Templates saves instantly — without reloading the page.

Note: Setlists can also be created and edited on mobile devices.

Marking a Setlist as "Not Yet Final"

If you've already entered a Setlist but it isn't locked in yet, you can flag it as work in progress — just like the Schedule.

In the 'Edit Setlist' window, check not yet final.

A not yet final badge then appears right next to the Setlist title in the Event Overview, so everyone knows the Setlist is still being worked on. Uncheck it once the Setlist is final and the badge disappears.

Who can set it: Admin, Agency, Tourmanagement and Artist can both set and see the marker, on desktop and mobile alike.

Alternatively, create a Setlist Template under to TEMPLATES > SETLIST > + CREATE SETLIST, and follow the steps above.

J.SHOW asks before deleting. For a song the prompt also names the consequence: a deleted song disappears from every setlist it appears in. When a song is removed from a setlist, the crew is notified — just as when adding or reordering.

Applying a Setlist

To apply a Setlist Template, you have two options.

➀ Apply a Template to Multiple Shows

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST > choose the relevant ‘Setlist’ in the Menu > APPLY TO EVENTS

Check all relevant Events you want to apply the Setlist to in the event list.

Click on APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS

➁ Apply a Template from Within a Show

Go to EVENTS > choose relevant Event from event list > OVERVIEW

Hit the inside the Setlist box.

Click on COPY FROM TEMPLATE.

Choose which Setlist Template you want to apply to the Event in question.
Changes will be automatically applied.

Formatting Templates and Printouts

In order to customize PDF printouts for different functions, you first need to create Formatting Templates.

You can customize and print tailored Setlists for different functions (e.g. lighting techs, musicians, monitor engineers, sound technicians) using Formatting Templates in the 'Edit Setlist' window. These templates let you define which fields are displayed for each function or team.

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST.

Click the + icon in the Formatting Templates box.

Alternatively: In a specific Event, click the icon in the 'Setlist' box, then click the icon inside the Formatting Templates box of the 'Edit Setlist' window.

A 'Create Formatting Template' window will appear.

Enter a Name, such as "Musicians" or "Lighting Techs," then click CREATE.
The 'Edit Formatting Template' window will appear.

Select which fields to include in the printout from the Add Fields list (e.g. Title, Duration, Composer, etc.) and drag & drop them into the order you want. Then fine-tune the layout with the options below. Changes are saved automatically.

General: show field names, include the total playing time, Align (centered, left, right) and Border (none, all, horizontal, vertical).

Type: pick the Font and the Font size for songs. For announcements and notes you can set a separate size via Font size announcement / note (or leave it on "same as songs"). With Auto font size (single page), J.SHOW shrinks the type automatically so the whole Setlist fits on one page.

Header: with Print the artist's logo your logo appears at the top of the page. Use Header on every page to repeat the header on every page of a multi-page Setlist. Under Header info you choose individually which details (date, type, venue, show name) appear in the header, and arrange them by drag & drop.

Changes are saved automatically.

To print, click the icon next to the Formatting Template.

Note: If you wish to edit or remove a Formatting Template from the list, hit the next to the Formatting Template in question, edit desired information or click on DELETE.

To preview a Setlist printout using a customized Formatting Template:

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST > choose the relevant ‘Setlist’ in the Menu > PREVIEW A ‘Preview’ window will appear.


Navigate through the Formatting Template drop-down menu in the top right corner to see the preview.

To print a Setlist using a customized Formatting Template:

Go to TEMPLATES > SETLIST > choose the relevant ‘Setlist’ in the Menu > PDF


A ’PDF’ window will appear.

Choose the desired Formatting Template from the list.
A PDF-file will be generated in a new window.

Formatting Templates let you control exactly which fields are shown when printing or exporting a Setlist.
For example, if you're creating a Setlist for the Artist, you can customize the template to include only the most relevant info for them.
This ensures that every PDF or CSV export contains the right details for the right person or function.

To customize a Formatting Template for PDF or CSV printout:

Go to the respective Event Overview > click on in the 'Setlist' box
An 'Edit Setlist' window will appear.

Click on next to the Formatting Template you want to customize.
An 'Edit Formatting Template' window will open.

Choose which fields and information to include under 'Add fields:'
To exclude fields, click next to the items you want to remove.

You can also adjust Alignment, Borders, Font Size, and other layout settings.

To print a Formatting Template as a PDF or CSV:

Go to the respective Event Overview > click on in the 'Setlist' box
The 'Edit Setlist' window will appear.

Click on either CSV or next to the relevant Formatting Template.
The printout will open in a separate tab.

Additional Features

This chapter covers a range of additional features and tools available on the Artist Platform.

Radius Clause

If a venue and/or promoter imposes a Radius Clause to avoid competing Events,
this is how you can check whether your other Events fall within the stipulated limits:

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event from the event list > SETTINGS > locate the 'Radius Clause' box.

You’ll see three options:

Note: Events that are not Show Dates will automatically be ignored.

Note: Once a Radius Clause is active, you will be instantly notified if another Event violates its conditions.
A warning will also appear inside the specific Event that violates the Radius Clause, flagging the conflict directly in the Event Overview.
Additionally, any violating Event will show a red exclamation mark next to it in the event list

Admin and Agency can dismiss a single conflict in the warning with ignore.

Announcement Protection

In addition to protecting the clause against competing performances, you can enable a separate Announcement Protection. It prevents already-announced shows from your own environment from conflicting with the protected show during a certain period — even if the shows themselves fall outside the regular protection window.

In the 'Radius Clause' field (while the radius clause is active), enable the checkbox Also protect announcements.
Then fill in the two date fields:

Violations of the announcement protection are marked in the event overview and in the event list with the label (Announcement), so you can distinguish performance and announcement conflicts at a glance.

For a visual overview of all shows and possible violations:
Go to EVENTS > MAP > find the 'Radius Clause' field.
Markers shown in red indicate violations. The map overlay displays the radius clause as readable flowing text with concrete dates — for example: "Within a radius of 150 km no events from 30.03.26 to 02.05.26 and no announcements from 30.03.26 to 05.05.26".

With the Radius Clause Checker you can also check the other way round: enter a city, a show date and optionally your own announcement date to see whether existing shows with an active radius clause would cover this combination. Radius and periods are read from the existing radius clause settings of the respective shows. The tooltip above the matches dynamically updates to the dates you entered.

Platform note: The full Announcement Protection configuration and the Radius Clause Checker are available on the Artist platform on Desktop. The mobile Artist version, the Agency platform and the App platform display the new labels ("Protection from" / "Protection until") — the detailed Announcement Protection configuration happens on Desktop in the Artist platform.

Announcements & Upcoming Shows

Don’t let the spotlight go to waste!
With the Announcements / Upcoming Shows feature, you can remind Artists to promote future gigs in the area while they're on stage for this Event.

To add Upcoming Events to the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box:

Go to EVENTS > select the relevant Event.

Click the inside the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box.
A 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' window will appear.

Check the box 'Automatically view announced events'.

Set the timeframe and radius within which upcoming Events should be shown.

Optionally, add a custom announcement in the text box and format it as explained in the Formatting section.

Click SAVE to finish.
All Events that match the selected criteria — along with any custom announcement — will now appear in the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box for the Artist to see.

Note: Only Events that have already been announced (i.e., made public) will be displayed.

Default for new Events:

Under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS, in the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box, tick “activate automatically for new events and automatically view announced events, which take place in the following … months in a radius of … km” and enter months and radius. Every change is saved right away.

Every Event created from then on takes over these values — also via the AI assistant, the import or an avail sheet. Existing Events stay unchanged; a duplicated Event keeps the setting of its original. For event types without a show (e.g. rehearsal, travel day) the box is not shown anyway.

Note: Admin and Agency can change this default.

To remove an Event from the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box:

Click on the next to the Event.
It will move to the 'Hidden Events' section, accessible via the in the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box.

To Unhide it, click the next to the Hidden Event.
It will then be displayed again in the 'Announcements / Upcoming Shows' box.

Badge

To create a digital Badge for your Crew Members:

Go to SETTINGS > BADGE and check 'Use Badge' inside the 'General' box.
You can either use the default background image, or upload your own in the 'Upload New Background Image' box by selecting a file (max 5MB) and clicking UPLOAD to finish.
In the 'Layout' box, you can configure the appearance of the badge:

In the 'Own Security Seal' box, you can upload a Custom Seal in .gif format.
Click UPLOAD to finish.

Note: A custom seal can be uploaded or deleted by Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement — like all other Badge settings. To remove an existing seal, use Delete own seal.

Note: All changes will be automatically displayed in the preview window.

Note: Once a badge is in use, the AAA (All Areas Access) badge icon is always displayed in the App for easy access — even in offline mode.

Embedding Your Event List on Your Website

With just a few clicks, you can seamlessly integrate all your public Tour Dates from J.SHOW into your personal Artist and/or Agency website.
Whether you're showcasing tour dates, promoting festival slots, or listing upcoming shows, J.SHOW generates an embeddable code that keeps your site updated in real-time—no extra work needed.

Effortless. Automatic. Always up to date.

To enable the 'Event list for website' feature in the Event Overview:

Go to SETTINGS > INTEGRATIONS > EVENTS FOR WEBSITE and check the use box in the 'Event list for website' section. Admin and Agency see this menu item; PRO is not required.

Note: Once this is enabled, the 'Event list for website' box will be available in the Event Overview for individual adjustments.

Then, choose whether you want the complete display (Country – City – Venue/Title*) or a minimal version (City / Title*).
(*Title will only appear when the "use instead of city / venue" option is activated in the Event’s Basic Information box.)

Optionally, enable the checkbox Show tour header. When active, tour names appear as section headings between the respective event blocks in the embedded website event list — visitors see e.g. "Spring Tour 2026" as a heading with the related events grouped underneath.

You’ll also find the 'Instructions for installation' button — a simple 3-step guide for embedding the feature on your site:

➀ Paste the provided code where you want the tour dates to appear on your website.
➁ Paste the second code snippet within the <head> section of your site.
➂ (Optional) Customize the code from step 2 to match your site’s style.

Data protection for your website:

The guide opens via the 'Instructions for installation' button. Below the three steps, the same window contains a 'Data protection' section. It describes what the embedded event list does technically when someone opens your website: it loads two files from your J.SHOW address, sets no cookies and stores nothing in your visitors' browsers. Only the details every page request carries are processed (including IP address, time, browser and language setting), on servers in Germany. Ticket links only pass data to the ticket provider once a visitor clicks them.

Underneath you find the 'Template for your privacy policy': a ready-made text with your platform address already filled in. Click into the text field to select the whole text, copy it and paste it into your website's privacy policy. 'J.SHOW privacy policy' takes you to our own privacy policy.

Note: These notes describe what the event list does technically — they are not legal advice. If you embed the list differently, adapt the template accordingly, and if in doubt, clarify with your own data protection adviser what your privacy policy needs.

Editing Website Display per Event:

Go to EVENTS > Select the relevant Event from the list.
Click the icon in the 'Event list for website' box.
A 'Event list for website' window will open, showing the date and weekday at the top.

Add up to three Ticket Links (Name + URL) and indicate if any are Sold Out.
Only a complete web address is saved. J.SHOW adds https:// to an address without it; anything else (such as a sentence or “box office”) is rejected by the form with a note.
Add up to two Support Acts.
Choose whether to Publish Now, Publish at the following date & time, or mark it as Not Public.

Note: The options Publish Now, Publish on Future Date, and Not Public are directly linked to the selections made in the Basic Information box of the Event, i.e. Announced, TBA and Not Public.

Click PREVIEW (UNFORMATTED) in the bottom left to review.
Click SAVE to confirm and close the window.

Note: The 'Event list for website' box will only appear for Events that are actual Shows. Other Event Types (e.g. Rehearsal, Travel Day) will not be shown on the website.

Note: If the + DAY feature was used in the 'Basic Information' window (e.g. for a Festival), the entire time period of the Festival will initially be released for the Tour Dates on your website.
However, if you’ve selected a specific Event Date in the 'Basic Information' window and later want to display only the actual performance day, you can now use the RESET PERIOD button in the 'Event list for website' window to update it accordingly.

Auto-Publishing TBA Events

If you set an Event to Publish at the following date & time, it will go live automatically once that moment is reached in the Event's time zone. You no longer need to switch the Event to published manually — J.SHOW checks every 5 minutes and releases due Events on its own.

No Longer Public From

Inside the 'Event list for website' window you'll find a No longer public from: field with date and time. Once that moment is reached in the Event's time zone, the website embed will automatically hide the Event.

Note: Past Events are hidden automatically anyway — fill this field in only if an Event should disappear before its actual show date.

Per-Event Display Overrides

Sometimes the website embed should show something different from the master record — a relocation, a different promoter name, a special URL. Inside the 'Event list for website' window you can now override these values per Event, without touching the master record:

Venue — Country, City and Name can be overridden per Event. Country is now a dropdown with ISO codes.
Partner — Name and Website can be overridden per Event.
Postponed / Relocated — two flags you can toggle manually whenever an Event has been moved to another date or to a different venue.

Click the icon next to the relevant value to reveal the input fields, change the value and click SAVE. A icon resets an override back to the master value.

Note: These per-Event overrides only affect the website embed and the API. The master records for venues and partners stay untouched. Available on the desktop version.

Sharing Events Across Platforms

With J.SHOW, you can easily share as many (or as few) details as needed about specific Events across different Artist Platforms.
You can even generate a sharable link to give access to outside parties who aren’t part of the platform.
Whether you're coordinating across multiple Artists or giving a venue tech crew access to the latest specs, J.SHOW keeps it simple, secure, and seamless.

To share / integrate a specific Event into another J.SHOW Artist Platform (as Support Act):

Go to EVENTS > choose the relevant Event from the event list > OVERVIEW > SHARE.
A 'Share' window will appear.

Click on + ADD A PLATFORM FROM A SUPPORT / FEATURE ACT.
A 'Share Event with the Platform of Support / Feature' window will appear.

Enter the J.SHOW domain of the Artist Platform you want to share the Event with.
Select the categories of information you wish to share.

Click the to finish.
You’ll be redirected back to the 'Share' window.

Click the again to finalize.
The Event will now appear in the event list of the other Artist Platform, complete with all selected details.

Once Platform A has shared an Event with Platform B:

Platform B will receive a notification in the event list stating: “This platform has been granted access to Events from another platform. They appear in this list and are marked with a + symbol. Click on any of these Events to add them to your own platform.”

Once Platform B clicks on one of these Events, the + symbol will disappear, and the Event Title will include ‘SUPRT’ followed by the name of Platform A.
Platform B can now independently add their own Travel Party, schedules, and notes inside the shared Event. They will only see the specific categories that Platform A has made accessible for this Event.

Both Platforms will have their own travel party, as well as separate input fields for scheduling and event-related information. Platform B can also control visibility settings for their own crew members regarding which shared data from Platform A is accessible.

Note: While neither Platform can see the individual crew members of the other, the Catering box will display the combined total number of meals required across both Travel Parties.

If Platform A withdraws the sharing (it removes Platform B again in the 'Share' window or deletes its Event), the Event stays on Platform B — with everything Platform B entered itself, such as the fee, travel party, schedules and comments.

From the moment the sharing is withdrawn, it shows nothing from Platform A except its name — the venue, partner and all other details are its own. During the following night it is unlinked: it no longer takes anything from Platform A. It keeps the venue, partner, contact persons, status and, as its name, the band name of Platform A once, as Platform B last saw them — wherever these fields were still empty on Platform B. Whatever Platform A had shared only through the ticks is dropped.
The admins of Platform B get an email about it, and at the top of the Event's 'Basic information' window a note is shown to Admin and Agency (also on mobile). You can keep the Event or delete it; Hide removes the note.

If Platform A is deleted entirely, the sharing ends in the same way. The note and the email then say 'Sharing ended'; the email is only sent for Events that are still upcoming.

Sharing Events with a Link

To generate a shareable link with an external party outside of J.SHOW:

Go to EVENTS > choose the relevant Event from the event list > OVERVIEW > SHARE.
A 'Share' window will appear.

Click on ENCRYPTED LINK TO THIS EVENT.
A 'Encrypted Link to This Event' window will appear.
You’ll find the link at the top of this window.

Select the categories of information you wish to share. The link itself stays the same, but whenever it's accessed, it will always reflect the categories currently set to visible.

On desktop you can replace the link in the same window if it should no longer be valid: click RENEW LINK and confirm the prompt. The current link then stops working – including the guest list and checking guests off at the door. Anyone who should keep access needs the new link, shown at the top of the window.

Click COPY TO THE CLIPBOARD to forward the link to the intended recipient.

Click the to close the window.
You’ll be redirected back to the 'Share' window.

Click the again to finalize.

Formatting a Textbox

Here's a complete breakdown of all manual formatting options available inside J.SHOW textboxes.

If you want one of these characters to stay just a character, put a backslash in front of it: \*, \_, \~, \[, \-. The backslash itself is not printed. That way a name starting with an asterisk stays intact instead of turning the following text bold.

To create two columns (left- and right-aligned) for a clean overview: Use the L -//- R format.
To separate rows clearly: Use the --- marker between rows.

Input Example:

Arrival -//- 12:00 PM  
---  
Lunch -//- 2:30 PM
      
Rendered Example:

Arrival 12:30 PM

Lunch 2:30 PM

You can also create interactive links:

These formatting options are available in most large textboxes across the Platform: Schedules, Custom Fields, Other Fields, Catering, and the temporary Accommodation text field (only visible when no accommodation has been selected).

Addresses and numbers become clickable by themselves. If you write a phone number, an email address or a web address starting with www. in a text, it automatically turns into a link in the display – even without [tel] or [mail]. Tapping the number starts the call on a phone, tapping the email address opens your email program.

This works in the Conversation on the event and in the general conversation, in the Private Note, in Comment, Catering, Other and the Custom fields, for Accommodation and Venue, for Arrival and Departure, and on a Dashboard in the text fields, to-dos and the conversation – on desktop, on mobile, in the app platform and in the shared event view.

Anything starting with +, 00 or 0 counts as a phone number. Dates, times, amounts, postal codes, IBANs and invoice numbers stay plain text.

In the Schedule, in contracts, invoices and in the PDFs (Daysheet, itinerary) this deliberately does not happen – there you keep using [tel] and [mail].

Weather Forecast

For events taking place within the next 14 days, J.SHOW automatically displays a weather forecast in the Event Overview — provided the venue has coordinates assigned.

The weather display includes:

Weather data is retrieved via the Open-Meteo API and automatically cached to ensure fast loading times.

Note: By default, temperature is displayed in °C. Under SETTINGS, the unit can be switched to °F.

Kira — Your Support Chat

Kira is J.SHOW's free support chat. It is available on the Artist Platform, the Agency Platform, and in the App, helping you with questions about using the platform. Kira answers questions and helps out — it doesn't change anything in your platform itself.

Kira is support only. Creating or editing data (events, venues, deals) is handled by the AI Assistant — a separate tab right next to it.

Starting a Chat

Desktop: Click the floating ? button in the bottom right corner to open the chat window. It is the rightmost of three round buttons — to its left sit the global search and the notification hub.

Mobile and App Platform: Tap the same round ? button in the bottom right corner — it sits on every page, in the same place as on desktop.

Ask your question — Kira can answer questions about the platform, help with problems, and record bug reports or feature requests.

Your chat history is kept within the same browser or within the app — whether you're on the Artist or Agency Platform, Kira remembers your conversation.

To start a new chat, click Reset chat at the bottom of the chat window. After you confirm, the previous chat history is deleted.

Kira or Assistant?

At the top of the chat window you'll find two tabs side by side: Support (that's Kira) and Assistant.

In short: Kira explains and helps, the Assistant gets things done. If you ask Kira to enter something, it points you to the Assistant — and conversely, the Assistant points you back to Kira for support or login questions.

The Assistant tab only appears if it has been enabled for you (by default for people with admin, agency or tour management rights). More on that in the next chapter: AI Assistant.

Kira Shows You Where Things Are

If you ask Kira where to find something, it doesn't just describe the way — it shows you. Matching its answer, it draws a colored frame around the spot it means and slightly dims the rest of the page, so your eye lands there straight away. If the area is off screen, the page scrolls there gently.

You don't have to click anything or switch anything on for this. Just ask as you normally would, for example “where do I enter the schedule?” or “where do I find the guest list?”.

If Kira names several spots, each one gets a small number, in the order it mentions them.

The chat window and the three round buttons in the bottom right corner always stay bright — Kira doesn't put itself in the dark.

The highlight disappears as soon as you click anywhere or press Esc. It covers nothing and blocks no input.

If the spot you're after is on another page, Kira remembers the highlight: as soon as you get there it is applied, and the chat window opens with Kira's explanation. This reminder is valid for half an hour and triggers exactly once.

Kira can point to the menu items, the tabs and boxes inside an Event, the tools of the event list and the buttons in the bottom right corner — on the Artist Platform, the Agency Platform and in the App. It also finds custom boxes and renamed custom fields, because every area announces itself with its visible heading.

And here in the manual Kira does the same: ask a question and the page jumps to the section that holds the answer and highlights it. You don't have to go looking for it.

Help, tutorials and manual

Besides Kira there is a help window with the Tutorials – short explainer videos on the individual features – and this manual. The tutorials open in the language you have set in J.SHOW.

Desktop: Click HELP in the bar at the bottom. At the very top of the window is 'Tutorials', below it 'User Guide', WhatsApp and 'report problem'.

Mobile: Tap the hamburger menu at the top right and then HELP – you'll find the same buttons there.

App platform: In the menu, Tutorials sits directly above User Guide.

Agency Platform: Here too, the bar at the bottom has HELP with the same buttons.

Agency Platform: Right next to it is WHAT'S NEW with the latest changes to J.SHOW — older entries load as you scroll. A small red dot on the button shows that there is something new you haven't opened in this browser yet; it disappears as soon as you open the window.

AI Assistant

The AI Assistant is a separate tab next to Kira in the same chat window. On request, it creates or edits data directly in your platform — such as events, venues, schedules, or deals. Unlike Kira support, the Assistant requires activation and is visible to admins only by default.

You give the Assistant work in three ways: directly in the chat, by email, or via AI file analysis on an event. For support or login questions, the Assistant sends you back to the Support tab.

What the Assistant Can Do

The Assistant maintains almost everything that belongs to an event. You tell it in plain language what should happen — it creates or edits the data. An overview, grouped by area:

What the Assistant deliberately does not do: send contracts, trigger e-signatures, or finalize invoices (it only sets the contract status). It doesn't manage platform or account settings — Kira helps you with that. In the people register it does add and invite people, but it cannot delete anyone there. And it doesn't invent anything from scratch (no dreaming up songs or routes): it manages your data rather than making it up. It also doesn’t handle conversations, multiple dashboards, daysheets and itineraries or AI tour routing — and not yet settlements and invoices including the DATEV export (there it only sets the settlement status). An import of your shows is handled by the support team, not by the Assistant.
If someone isn't allowed to create new events, it won't suggest any either: it tells them so and lists the events it recognized.

Instructing the Assistant in Chat

The most direct way is the Assistant tab in the chat window: type your instruction in plain language and send it.

When you open it, the Assistant greets you like this: "Tell me what to take care of – create events, fill in details, keep venues up to date. Feel free to attach a file, too."

Just phrase it freely, for example "Create an event on Sep 12 at Columbiahalle Berlin". You can also attach a file to your instruction — the Assistant reads it as well and processes it together with your text.

Whether the Assistant enters changes directly or proposes them first depends on the configured mode (see Propose or Apply Directly). In propose mode, it replies with "I've prepared the changes as a proposal for you" — you then find them in the show overview on the affected event, ready to confirm.

Advancing by Email

The Assistant maintains your events without any typing in the platform — straight from your email inbox. Every platform has its own trigger address in the form yourname@j.show.

Write an instruction directly to this address, or simply add it to CC of your emails with promoters, venues, or hotels.

It reads along and enters the content automatically: events, venues, schedules, accommodations, and more.

You configure the trigger address and the authorized senders under Activation & Authorization.

Platform note: Setup happens in the platform settings (see below); advancing by email itself works from any inbox.

AI File Analysis

Upload a document to an event and let the Assistant enter the content for you — contracts, daysheets, hotel lists, and the like.

Desktop & Mobile: Open the file upload on the event and enable the option analyze with AI.

Optionally, you can note in an instruction field what the Assistant should focus on — for example "only enter stage dimensions, capacity, and load-in".

If you keep giving the AI the same instruction, save it once as a default instruction under SETTINGS > AI Assistant > AI File Analysis. It then pre-fills the instruction field on every upload — and you can still adjust it per file.

The Assistant understands images, PDFs, Office documents, and text formats (including ODP presentations). While it reads, an animated hint appears on the document.

If there is no suggested change, the “Analysis complete” window shows the result, now in the app as well.

Propose or Apply Directly

You decide whether the Assistant proposes changes first (you confirm them) or enters them directly. The mode can be set separately for email advancing and for file analysis (see Activation & Authorization).

In propose mode, a panel "Assistant's proposal" appears on the affected event:

Each proposed item is listed individually and can be selected or deselected.

With Apply you write the selected items into the event; with Discard you reject the suggestion.

The panel works on desktop and mobile. Selection fields appear as dropdowns with the real terms of your platform, the travel party as deselectable people chips.

If you have closed the panel, reopen it with the "Assistant's proposal" button — on a computer it appears in every tab of the event as long as the proposal is open.

If something isn't right about a proposal that has just been prepared, simply tell the Assistant (e.g. “add the company for all three”). As long as nothing from it has been applied or deselected yet, it creates a corrected version and the old proposal disappears — you don't need to reject it for that.

Your own rules

If your production has fixed habits, you don't have to repeat them to the Assistant with every request: under SETTINGS > AI Assistant you'll find the box Your own rules. Whatever you enter there, the Assistant takes into account on all three routes — in chat, in advancing by email and in AI file analysis.

An example: "Don't adopt the details about the venue's sound equipment — our own sound equipment travels with us." Write the rules in plain language (up to 2,000 characters) and save them.

The difference from the default instruction of the AI File Analysis: that one only pre-fills the instruction field on file upload and can be changed per file. Your own rules, by contrast, apply permanently and on every route.

An explicit instruction in a single request takes precedence over your rules. And they don't extend what the Assistant is allowed to do — permissions and safeguards stay as they are.

Quota & Credits

All AI features — Assistant, email advancing, file analysis, and tour routing — run on a shared AI quota measured in credits. It refills automatically every month.

With PRO, the included quota is twice as large.

Need more? Buy credit packages under SETTINGS > AI Assistant, and optionally enable automatic top-up so your balance refills on its own when it runs low.

The Credits history right inside the quota box lists your latest AI jobs: type (assistant instruction, file analysis, e-mail advancing, tour routing), time, and credits used — including whether they came from free credits or purchased credits. Click Show more to load further entries.

Note: When the balance is used up, the analyze with AI checkbox in the file upload is disabled — with a note on when the quota refills. Admins additionally see a direct link to top up.

If the balance only runs out during a file analysis, the file stays saved, and a note appears on it saying that it was not analyzed. As soon as credits are available again, you restart the analysis from this note.

Kira knows the credit balance: if it is used up, she says so — instead of promising a handover to the Assistant that can no longer run. A goodwill credit appears in the credit history. If you switch on auto top-up without having stored a payment method, the reason is now shown in the settings; likewise, mails rejected at the gate become visible there.

Activation & Authorization

The Assistant and email advancing are set up in the platform settings — visible to admins only.

Desktop: Go to SETTINGS > AI Assistant. Here you'll find the trigger address, the authorized senders, and the mode setting (propose / apply directly).

By default, “Everyone with Admin, Agency or Tourmanagement rights + the people enabled below” is selected: everyone with admin, agency or tour management rights may use the Assistant, plus the people you release individually. With “Only the people enabled below” you restrict access exclusively to these released people. This does not apply to email advancing: there the Assistant only processes emails from the authorized senders entered.

The Assistant can only do what the triggering person may do in the web interface: Tourmanagement e.g. cannot publish to the website, set a radius clause or edit the contract – and without “Tourmanagement may edit all events” only on events of its own travel party. Contract and deal are set by Admin and Agency only. Artist, Crew+, Crew and Guest cannot change event data through it that the interface denies them.

Note: When the Assistant enters something, the editor shown is always the person who triggered the action — the crew is notified just like with a web change.

Templates: The Operational Backbone of Your Production

Templates act as the foundational logic layer of your tour setup — enabling scalable, repeatable workflows across Events by standardizing schedules, crew, travel, and accommodations with a single source of truth.

Event Overview Templates

To create a general 'Event Overview Template' that include Schedules, Catering, Rooming, To Do's, Contact Persons and Custom Infos:

Go to TEMPLATES > OVERVIEW > + NEW TEMPLATE.


To rename the default 'TEMPLATE #', click on RENAME in the lower bar.
A 'Rename’ window will appear where you can assign a new Title for this Template, e.g. FESTIVALS 2025.

To empty a template, click EMPTY in the lower bar and confirm with YES: the content goes, the title and number stay. This is available for Overview, Travel Party, Vehicles and Contract templates.

Note: You can create up to 9 Event Overview Templates per Platform

Adding a Schedule within an Event Overview Template

To create a 'Schedule' within an Event Overview Template:

Hit the inside the Schedule box.
A 'Schedule' window will appear.

Name the Title of the Schedule next to Description:, e.g. General, Crew, Artist, etc.

Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.

Select who this ‘Schedule’ is visible for and SAVE

Note: You can create up to 3 Schedules per Template. If you're creating different Schedules — for example, one for the Crew and one general Festival Schedule — make sure to select the correct visibility permissions for each, so that only the intended group can access them.

Adding Catering Info

To add 'Catering' Info:

Hit the inside the Catering box.
A 'Catering' window will appear.

Select and fill in all relevant information using the formatting tools provided.

Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.
Use ADDRESS to provide a Google Maps link to the Catering Location.

Click SAVE to finish.

Adding Custom Notes

To add Custom Information:

Click the inside the Custom Field box.
An 'Custom Field' window will appear.

Name the Title of the Custom Field next to Title:

Fill in all relevant information using the formatting tools provided.
Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.

Select who should have visibility for this section and click SAVE.

Adding To Dos

For a full breakdown on how to create a To Do List Template and apply it to individual Events, please visit the To Do List section.

Note: If you apply the To-Do section of an Event Overview Template to an Event, its To-Dos are added to the existing ones — existing To-Dos stay, and a To-Do with the same text is not created twice.

Adding Rooming Info

To create a detailed 'Rooming List':

Click the inside the Rooming List box next to the desired 'Accommodation #'.
A 'Rooming for accommodation' window will appear.
You can now select the number and size of each bedroom via the dropdown menu.

Here are the examples of room types and their intended occupancy:

Manually assign rooms by clicking the + icon next to each room. You can also indicate early check-in or late check-out per guest.

Click to finish.

Note: If you apply a Rooming Template and don’t see any names listed yet, check whether the corresponding people have been added to the Event’s travel party. As soon as they are, their names will automatically appear in the pre-assigned rooms.

The box initially shows Accommodation 1 to Accommodation 4. As soon as Accommodation 4 has rooms, Accommodation 5 appears below it; after each further accommodation with rooms the next one is added, up to Accommodation 20. When the template is applied, these rooms are carried over as well — see additional accommodations.

Adding Contact Persons

To add a 'Contact Persons':

Click the inside the CP Other box.
A 'CP Other' window will appear.

Fill out the Function (e.g. technical director, tour manager, tour assistant, etc.), Name, Email, and/or Phone.

Select who should have visibility for this section and click ADD.

Adding Other Info

Should you require any additional or miscellaneous information to be available at a glance, use the Other box to add any finalizing details.

To add an 'Other' Template:

Click the inside the Other box.
Fill in all relevant information using the formatting tools provided.

Note: For a complete overview of all available formatting options, please visit the Formatting a Textbox section.

Select who should have visibility for this section and click SAVE.

Applying Event Overview Templates

Note: When applying an Event Overview Template to a specific Event, you don’t have to apply the entire Template. Each section — such as To-Dos, Schedule, or Rooming — can be applied individually.

Empty fields: Sections that are empty in the template are listed with an (empty) label and are not ticked. A template never clears a field on the Event — if you want to clear something, do it directly in the Event. A schedule that only has a title also counts as empty. A custom field with only a title, on the other hand, is applied: it goes into a slot without a title or content and replaces nothing. If none is free, the window says so.

To apply the ‘Event Overview Template’ to relevant Events, you have two options:

➀ From the Template Section:

Go to TEMPLATES > OVERVIEW > APPLY TO EVENTS

Choose which categories (e.g. Schedule, Catering, To Do, etc.) you would like to apply to the Events in question

Click on SELECT EVENTS

Check all relevant Events in the event list

Click on APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS

➁ From within the Event:

Go to EVENTS > choose relevant Event from event list

Go to OVERVIEW > TEMPLATE

Choose the General Template you want to apply to this Event

Choose which categories (e.g. Schedule, Catering, To Do, etc.) you would like to apply to the Event in question and click APPLY

If the Event already has content: Empty sections are simply filled, and if the Event already has exactly the same content, nothing happens. If it has something different, “Already filled in on this event:” appears below the section with the choice Keep, Append or Replace. Keep is preselected — nothing is overwritten unless you explicitly choose so.

Custom fields are matched by title: a template field goes into the Event's custom field with the same title, otherwise into an unused one. If none is left, “No custom field left on this event:” appears — choose Don't apply or Replace the field named there.

If you apply the template to several Events via TEMPLATES > OVERVIEW and some already have content, a window opens after APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS: for each section you see on how many of the selected Events it is already filled in (e.g. “already filled in on 3 of 5 events”) and make the same choice. Then click APPLY.

Save Event as Template

You can save the data of an existing Event directly as a new template — available for all 5 template types: Overview, Travel Party, Vehicles, Contract, and Finances.

In the desired Event, go to the respective tab (e.g. OVERVIEW, CONTRACT, or EXPENSES).

Click SAVE AS TEMPLATE.

Note: The button only appears if fewer than 9 templates of that type exist.

Travel Party Template

For a full breakdown on how to seamlessly create and manage the travel party — including how to build Travel Party Templates — please visit the Travel party section.

Vehicle Template

For a full breakdown on how to add Vehicles and create Vehicle Templates, please visit the Vehicles section.

Setlist Template

For a full breakdown on how to create Song Pools and build Setlists using Templates, please visit the Setlists section.

Linking Templates to Event Types

Easily create dedicated Templates for different Types of Events — such as Tours, Festivals, Travel Days, Set Up, and more — and link them directly to those Event Types.
Once linked, the associated Template will be automatically applied every time you create a new Event of that Type — with Schedules, Rooming, Catering, Contact Persons (CPs), and more already pre-filled. No more repetitive admin. Just pure efficiency.

To link Templates to specific Event Types:

Create a dedicated Template (if you haven’t already) under TEMPLATES. Choose the appropriate Template Category (Overview, General, travel party, Contract, etc.) and name it accordingly.

Go to TEMPLATES > EVENT TYPES. You’ll now see a Table of all Event Types, including any custom Event Types you’ve created, as well as all Template Categories to choose from (Overview, travel party, Vehicles, Contract, Finance, etc.).

Use the dropdown menu in each Category column to link every Event Type with its relevant Templates.
Your changes will be saved automatically.

Example: If you want all Tour Events to automatically use your General Overview and Vehicle Templates, select those Templates from the dropdown menus in the corresponding rows.

Note: Templates are only applied automatically when creating a new Event. Existing Events remain unchanged by default.
However, if you change or enter the Event Type later under 'Basic Information' of an existing Event, a checkbox will appear allowing you to apply templates which are linked to this event type.

Guest list template: areas for every show

If many of your Events need the same guest list areas (hall, box, balcony …), create them once as a template. Every new Event then gets them automatically.

To set up the template:

Go to TEMPLATES > GUEST LIST. The template starts out empty.

Enter a name in the add area field and click + add area. Rename an area directly in its text field, change the order with ▲/▼, and remove it with ✕.

Under Applies to you see every event type that is a show — all ticked to begin with. Untick the event types the area should not apply to. An event type you create later that is a show gets the area automatically. Event types without a show (such as Travel, Set Up, Tear Down or Off Day) have no guest list and are not offered.

If every entry should be assigned to an area, tick Area required when adding entries below the areas. It applies to the whole template and is passed on to the main list of every Event that gets areas from it.

When is the template applied? When you create an Event and — if you apply the templates — when you change its event type, just like the other event type templates. It only ever adds: an area with the same name that the Event already has is not created twice, and existing areas, including their entries and quotas, stay as they are.

To add an area to existing Events:

Click + Add to all upcoming events (N) on the area — the number tells you how many Events are still missing it — and confirm.

This covers Events from today onwards with one of the ticked event types. Events that already have the area, canceled Events and Events without a guest list stay unchanged. Once no Event is missing it, it reads All upcoming events of these event types already have this area.

The guest list template can be edited by Admin and Agency, on desktop.

Planning status fields

In addition to Planning, Stage rider and Hospitality Rider, you can create as many status fields of your own as you need — for example for parking, merch or a radio license. They appear in the Event right below the Basic information, in the Focus View and as selectable columns in the CSV export of the event list.

To create a field:

Go to TEMPLATES > PLANNING STATUS and click + Add field.

Enter a Description. Optionally add a Short label (up to 5 characters) — it is used as the column header in the focus table. Leave it empty to use the first four letters of the name.

Under Options, define the values and pick a color for each (green, yellow, orange, red, blue or gray). A new field comes with OK, open and n/a as suggestions; use the empty rows for more values and remove single values with delete.

Under Show for these event types, tick the Event types the field should appear for. Event types without a show (such as day off or travel day) start unticked.

Click save.

In the overview, the arrows change the order in which the fields appear in the Event, and the pencil icon opens a field for editing.

Note: Deleting a field removes the values set for it on all Events.

Note: Admin and Agency can create and edit fields. Who may set the values on an Event is described under Planning status.

Permissions

Access Rights

Access Rights are the rights or Permissions granted to a User Profile.

Important: Please note that there is a distinction between 'Functions' and Access Rights/Permissions, even though similar terminology may be used in both contexts. For example, an Artist can refer to the 'Function' of an individual, while the Permission Level 'Artist' is a specific set of Access Rights. Inviting an Artist to a travel party does not automatically grant them the 'Artist' Access Rights.

When inviting a new Person to an Artist Platform, you’ll be asked to select the appropriate Access Rights/Permission Level for that individual.

To change a Profile's Access Rights as Admin/Agency, login to an Artist Platform > go to PEOPLE > select the Person whose Profile you want to edit > an Edit profile window will appear > choose the desired Access Rights from the drop-down menu in the bottom right corner

If you're logged in to the Artist Platform, your email address and Access Rights/Permission Level are displayed in the bottom left corner.

On the Artist Platform, you can preview how the Platform appears for different Access Rights by selecting a level from the list in the lower left corner.

Note: To display certain functions, you must be a member of the travel party itself.

Permission Matrix by Category

Dashboard Permissions

Controls what users see on the Dashboard.
The table below shows only Dashboard-related permissions — controlling who can view specific fields and sections on the Dashboard itself.

VIEW / EDIT
(If not specified, permission includes both)
Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
DASHBOARD Tab
General Files / Rider VIEW
General Files / Rider EDIT
Subscribe to the calendar
Personal Files
General Conversation
Event Changes History VIEW
Guest list requests ➊ ➊
Conversations
Sales Statistics PRO

➊ Only visible if 'add and edit' is checked under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS

Events Permissions

Controls access to the global event list and all tour-wide overviews.
The table below determines who can view the complete list of Events across the platform — including general overviews, pre-sale insights, and the full event list.

VIEW / EDIT Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
EVENTS
EVENT OVERVIEW ➊➋ ➊ ➊ ➌
MAP ➊ ➊ ➊ ➌
CALENDAR
BLOCKS ➍ ➍ ➍ ➍
CREATE NEW EVENT ➏
Event list ➎ ➎ ➎ ➎
PRESALES PRO

➊ By default, all events are visible. To restrict visibility to members of the travel party only, enable the option "Visibility of Events" under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS.
➋ By default, events can only be edited if part of the travel party. To allow editing of all events, activate "Tourmanagement may edit all events" under "Permissions for Tourmanagement" in SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS (only possible if "Visibility of Events" is not enabled).
➌ Events are only visible if the user is part of the travel party. Editing is not possible.
➍ By default, not visible. Visibility and/or adding of Blocks can be activated under "Blocks" in SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS. The Calendar itself is available to every permission level — showing only the Events that level is allowed to open. Blocks appear in it only if they are visible to that permission level; Plan mode in the Event list depends on this as well.
➎ If visibility is restricted to members of the travel party, and you're not included, the event list will still be visible (but not editable) if the Crewbooking tool is enabled for your profile — allowing you to still indicate your availability.
➏ Disabled by default. Can be enabled under "Permissions for Tourmanagement" in SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS. When enabled, Tourmanagement can create new Events and duplicate existing Events.

Manages access to details within individual Events.
The table below defines what users can see and edit inside a specific Event — including show details, crew assignments, internal notes, and more.

VIEW / EDIT
(If not specified, permission includes both)
Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
EVENT OVERVIEW VIEW ➊ ➊ ➊ ➌
EVENT OVERVIEW EDIT ➋
Basic Information VIEW
Basic Information EDIT ➒ ➒ ➋
To Do
Private Note
GUEST LIST VIEW ➑ ➑ ➑ ➑ ➑
GUEST LIST ENTRY ➍➎ ➍➎ ➎ ➎
GUEST LIST SETTINGS ➓ ➓ ➓
TRAVEL PARTY VIEW
TRAVEL PARTY EDIT
VEHICLES VIEW
VEHICLES EDIT
CONTRACT PRO ➏ ➏
EXPENSES PRO ➏ ➏
PRESALES PRO ➐ ➐ ➐ ➐

➊ By default, all events are visible. To restrict visibility to members of the travel party only, enable the option "Visibility of Events" under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS.
➋ By default, events can only be edited if the user is part of the travel party. To allow full edit access, enable "Tourmanagement may edit all events" under "Permissions for Tourmanagement" in SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS (only possible if "Visibility of Events" is not enabled).
➌ Events are only visible if the user is part of the travel party.
➍ Can ‘add and edit’ guest list entries only if enabled under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS > Add & edit guest list.
➎ Can ‘request only’ if enabled under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS
➏ PRO feature – only visible if enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS (‘visible for artists’ or ‘visible to the respective Tourmanagement’).
➐ Only visible if enabled under SETTINGS > TICKETS > Display ticket sales in event overview.
➑ Visibility of the entire Guest list can be managed under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS > "Visibility of Guest list".
➒ Event rescheduling, duplication, and deletion only possible with this permission.
➓ Can edit the Guest list settings for the event (only Admin, Agency, and TM — TM only with edit rights for the event).

People Permissions

Covers everything related to managing users and team members.
This includes permission to invite, confirm, or edit people on the platform — whether they’re Artists, Crew, Guests, or people with any other permission level.

VIEW / EDIT Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
PEOPLE Tab
OVERVIEW
CREW BOOKING ➋ ➌ ➌ ➌
ADD NEW PERSON ➊
EXPORT ➋
GLOBAL ➍ ➍
FILES ➋

➊ Only if the option “Tourmanagement is not allowed to invite or edit people” is not selected under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > “Permissions for Tourmanagement”
➋ Only if “Tourmanagement may edit all events” is enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > “Permissions for Tourmanagement”
➌ Only if the Crewbooking tool is activated for the respective profile
➍ Only if the person has activated the Global Crew Register in their profile

Templates Permissions

Controls who can view, create, or modify templates.

VIEW / EDIT Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
TEMPLATES Tab
SETLIST
OVERVIEW
TRAVEL PARTY
VEHICLES
EVENT TYPES
GUEST LIST
CONTRACT PRO
FINANCES PRO

Miscellaneous Permissions

Controls access to secondary but essential production tabs like Vehicles, Venues, Accommodations, and Finance.

VIEW / EDIT Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
VEHICLES Tab
VENUES Tab
PARTNERS Tab
ACCOMMODATIONS Tab
PEOPLE > BOOKING LIST ➋
FINANCES Tab PRO ➊

➊ Only visible when the option is activated under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS.

➋ Only when “Tourmanagement may edit all events” is enabled under SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS.

Settings Permissions

Manages access to Platform-wide configuration options.
These settings control who can edit system defaults, permissions, and other foundational elements under the SETTINGS section.

VIEW / EDIT Admin Agency TM Artist Crew+ Crew Guest
SETTINGS Tab
PERMISSIONS
Visibility Venue Information
Technical Contacts
Birthdays
Visibility of Events
Permissions for Tourmanagement
To Do
Blocks
Announcements
PEOPLE
Conditions
GUEST LIST
Layout PDF
General
Visibility of Guest list
Add & edit guest list
Aftershow / Backstage / Photo
Limit
Price Categories PRO
DAYSHEET
BADGE
LAYOUT
NOTIFICATIONS
TICKETS PRO
CONTRACTS PRO
FINANCES PRO
PLATFORM
Cancel Platform

Visibility of Events

In the box SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS > Visibility of Events you decide per permission level who is restricted: for each activated permission level, those people can only see or open events where they themselves are listed in the travel party.

People with Admin, Agency, and Artist permission always see every event.

People with Guest permission are always restricted — this row is permanently checked and cannot be changed.

For Crew, Crew+, and Tourmanagement there is a separate checkbox each. The checkboxes build on each other: a permission level can only be restricted if all levels below it are restricted as well — when checking or unchecking, the dependent checkboxes are adjusted automatically.

Note for tour management: If visibility is restricted for Tourmanagement, a person with this permission also cannot create new events — even if the option 'may also create new events' is activated under 'Permissions for Tourmanagement'.

Users with the Crewbooking tool enabled can still view the entire List of Events to mark their availability. If their permission level is restricted, they can only open Event Details if they are included in the travel party. Optionally, events with status Idea or Option can be hidden entirely from people with the crewbooking tool.

If visibility is restricted for at least one level, the Event Overview shows Admin and Agency Visible to in the top left, with two numbers: the first counts everyone who can open the Event regardless of the travel party — Admin, Agency, Artist, the levels that are not restricted and the agency's staff. The second (+) counts the people with a restricted level who are in the travel party. A click opens the list with names and permission levels. Deactivated people and open invitations are not counted. This applies on desktop and in the mobile view.

Platform Settings

The SETTINGS area of the Artist Platform contains all configuration options that shape how your platform looks, behaves, and communicates. Settings are organized into sections accessible via tabs.

Settings on your phone

Some of the platform settings can also be changed in the mobile view — the ones whose features can be used on a phone as well.

Mobile: Tap the hamburger menu in the top right corner, then Settings. Use the bar at the top to switch between NOTIFICATIONS, GUEST LISTS, DAYSHEETS and BADGE.

Below it you find the same boxes as on desktop, and they save the same way. People for the guest list notifications are picked from a list right on your phone.

Who sees what: Admin and Agency see all four sections. Tourmanagement sees GUEST LISTS, DAYSHEETS and BADGE and starts on GUEST LISTS.

Everything else — such as permissions, display, contracts, finance, invoices or venue availability — stays on desktop under SETTINGS. The Daysheet Builder is not available on the phone; DAYSHEETS only shows the classic settings there.

Global Settings

Under SETTINGS > PLATFORM, you'll find the core settings for your Artist Platform.

Artist Information

Format

Display Options

Mandatory fields profile

Choose which Profile fields are additionally mandatory. Each of the three fields has its own checkbox:

Note: First name and email are always required.

Data Privacy

Setlist

Event Overview on Website

Enable the feature to display your public tour dates on an external website. Choose between a Standard or Minimalist display format. See Embedding Your Event List on Your Website for details.

API Access

Create and manage API tokens for programmatic access to your platform data. The documentation is available under api/index.php on your platform.

You can create multiple API keys per platform — for example, one per integrated system (website, mobile app, internal service). Each key can be renamed, shown/hidden, copied or deleted separately.

Desktop (Artist platform): Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM > section API Tokens.

Desktop (Agency platform): Go to SETTINGS > GENERAL > section API Tokens.

Click + Generate new API token to create a new key. Every new key comes with an inline label that you can rename directly.

Next to each key there are three actions: Show/hide, Copy and Delete. Existing single-string keys are detected automatically and migrated to the new format on the first change — existing integrations keep working without any adjustment.

Event Fields in the API

The API returns extra fields per Event so you can fine-tune what is visible when on your website or in your own integrations:

The API generally returns all upcoming Events — your consumer decides whether a given Event is shown, based on these status fields.

By default, only published and TBA Events are returned. If a key should also see unpublished Events, you can enable that per API key:

Click the icon next to the API key — a settings window for that key opens. Tick the include unpublished events checkbox and save.

Note: This setting is per key — existing keys keep their previous behaviour. The tba and tbaDate fields are kept for backwards compatibility but are superseded by publishStatus and releaseStart.

On the Agency platform, API keys and the settings window with the include unpublished events checkbox work identically. There you can additionally pick which Artist platforms each key has access to.

Write Access (Artist platform)

The API can now no longer just read — it can also create and edit data. Writable are: events, venues, accommodations, promoters/partners, catering, setlist, vehicles, guest list, deal/finances, and file attachments.

Write access is enabled per API key individually:

Click the icon next to the key to open the settings window.

Enable Write access (create & fill events) so the key may write data.

In addition there is the checkbox Read content (schedules & custom fields) for read access to these detail fields.

Note: This checkbox exists on the Artist platform only. The Agency API can write as well — but only into the artist platforms you tick one by one in the Write column of the agency key's settings window. There is no global write switch there; every other platform stays read-only for that key (see Agency API).

For natural-language data entry (without the API), see AI Assistant.

Display & Layout

Under SETTINGS > LAYOUT, customize the visual appearance of your platform. For detailed instructions, see Logo & Layout.

Configuration options include:

Besides light and dark there is the setting automatic (settings from your device). The platform then follows your device and switches along with it when your phone or computer goes dark in the evening.

Notification Settings

Under SETTINGS > NOTIFICATIONS, configure how and when the platform sends notifications.

Choose who receives notifications:

For deleted events there is a second question next to who gets told: whether anyone should be told at all. The checkbox Only if the event was confirmed or announced limits the message to events that were actually standing.

Events with the status idea, option or not yet confirmed are then deleted silently — no email and no entry in the notification center.

The checkbox comes on top of the chosen recipient group, it does not replace it — the three recipient circles above rule each other out, this one works in addition.

Moving or deleting several events one after another no longer sets off a separate email for every single step. The messages are collected per recipient and sent as one email.

It goes out once nothing has happened to that person for ten minutes. So the time is quiet, not a fixed window: as long as you keep working, the collected email waits for you.

The notification hub is not affected — every change still shows up there straight away. Only the email sending is bundled.

Itinerary & Daysheet Settings

Under SETTINGS > DAYSHEET, two tabs are available: Classic and Builder.

Classic

In the Classic tab, configure which information sections appear on printed Daysheets and Itineraries.

Venue Information

Promoter Information

Tour Information

Builder — the Template Editor

In the Builder tab you design your daysheet templates freely via drag & drop, instead of only toggling the predefined sections.

With New template you create a template and drag the desired blocks (venue, contact persons, schedule, catering, logistics, etc.) into the order you want.

With Default template you decide which template is used by default.

Travel party blocks: The Builder also offers these blocks:

Tip: A template that contains only the Travel Party Catering block gives you a PDF for the caterer.

Note: These blocks exist only in the Builder. The classic daysheet and your existing templates stay unchanged. Passive members visible to Admin/Agency only are not listed in the Travel Party block — no matter who creates the daysheet. The block thus counts like the travel party in the event. Those of them who eat with the group still count in the Travel Party Catering block.

Note: The Builder is available to Admin, Agency, and Tourmanagement.

Guest List Settings

Under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS, configure how the guest list feature works. See Guest list Settings for details.

Ticket Settings PRO

Under SETTINGS > TICKETS, configure how presale ticket data is structured.

Contract Settings PRO

Under SETTINGS > CONTRACTS, configure contract document defaults. See Contract Settings in the PRO section for details.

Key options include:

Finance Settings PRO

Under SETTINGS > FINANCES, configure financial defaults.

Your Own Expense Categories

Alongside the fixed expense categories, you can create your own — right next to the VAT section under SETTINGS > FINANCES.

Click Add your own category, enter a Category name and save.

Use Edit to rename a category, the checkbox to deactivate or reactivate it, and the delete option to remove it.

Your own categories are available everywhere the fixed ones are: when recording expenses, in the VAT and cost-coverage assignment, in settlements, the PDF and CSV export, and in the reports. A deactivated category disappears from the dropdowns but stays visible on past expenses — nothing gets lost.

Invoice Settings PRO

Under SETTINGS > INVOICE, configure invoice document templates and defaults.

Billing Entities

You can configure multiple Billing Entities (companies/entities) that are available when creating invoices. Each billing entity has its own:

Go to SETTINGS > INVOICE to add or edit billing entities. One billing entity is marked as Default and automatically pre-selected for new invoices.

When creating an invoice, advance invoice, or commission/expense invoice, select the desired billing entity via the dropdown in the form. Billing entities are displayed as colored badges in the invoice list.

If your platform is linked to an agency, the Agency Billing Entity is also available, using the agency's company details.

Custom Mail Server per Billing Entity

If you invoice under several companies, you usually send their invoices from their address too. The mail server therefore belongs to the billing entity, not to the platform.

Go to SETTINGS > INVOICE and open the billing entity you want.

In the Custom mail server block, choose between J.SHOW email and Custom mail server.

Enter: Sender name, Sender email, SMTP Server, Port, Encryption, Username, Password.

Click Test connection before switching the account on — the test uses exactly the account that will send later.

Tip: The password is stored encrypted. An empty password field means “untouched” — an accidental click into the field does not clear the stored account.

On the Agency Platform the same block exists for the agency itself.

DATEV Settings PRO

Availability: The DATEV integration is only active for platforms based in Germany.

Under SETTINGS > INTEGRATIONS > DATEV, configure the DATEV accounting integration. The configuration is identical to the Agency-level DATEV settings. See DATEV Integration for details.

When using multiple Billing Entities, the DATEV configuration can be set up individually per billing entity — e.g. with separate charts of accounts, client numbers, or account mappings.

Exporting Data

J.SHOW offers extensive export capabilities across the platform. Whether you need spreadsheets, PDFs, or accounting-compatible files — here's an overview of all available export options.

Event List Exports

Export your Event data by going to EVENTS and clicking the EXPORT button in the top navigation. An export dialog opens with all available formats — including the CSV export.

Available Formats

Note: A calendar subscription is not an export, so it is not in this window. You find the subscription address on the DASHBOARD in the box Subscribe to the calendar (see Calendar Subscription).

Note: The older button "Event list as CSV (with setlist)" has been removed. Setlist exports now run exclusively through the setlist module (see Setlists & GEMA Exports).

Crew & People Export

Export your team directory from PEOPLE > EXPORT.

The CSV export includes:

Note: Sensitive data (passwords, internal comments) is automatically excluded. The export is GDPR-compliant.

Venues, Accommodations & Partners

Export your databases from the respective tabs:

All database exports are in CSV format.

Setlist & GEMA Exports

Setlist CSV

Export setlists as CSV files containing position, title, duration, work number, composer, notes, and any custom fields you've defined.

Setlist PDF

Print formatted Setlists using your customized Formatting Templates. Each template can include different fields for different functions (e.g. musicians, lighting, sound).

GEMA Reports PRO

For GEMA-compliant copyright reporting, two specialized Excel (XLSX) exports are available:

You can also reach both exports from the Setlist box of the Event via G1.2 and G3.1. For G3.1, J.SHOW fills in the report header from the Event: date, start and end (from the Stage time, the Event's start/end or the one unambiguous showtime line in the schedule), name and type of event, venue with address, and the promoter – with their GEMA billing address if one is stored. If a value isn't unambiguous, the field stays empty rather than being guessed; check the header before uploading.

You can preset two entries in the header of G3.1 for all events: under SETTINGS > PLATFORM, in the Template for GEMA Export V3.1 area, the fields Are you the event organizer yourself? (Yes / No) and Type of performance (Headliner, Support act, Sole band / ensemble, Several equal bands / artists, DJ live act, Stage / theatre performance). The export enters the default into the report – in the wording of the GEMA template, i.e. in German, even if your interface uses another language. If a field is set to no default, it stays empty in the report.

Pre-Sales & Ticket Exports PRO

Presale CSV

Export pre-sale ticket data as a CSV file with all ticketing information.

Presale PDF Report

Generate a comprehensive PDF report of presale activity with:

Finance & DATEV Exports PRO

Financial Excel Export

Generate detailed XLSX workbooks with multiple sheets: Revenue, Actual Expenses, Planned Expenses, and Profit — grouped by Settlement Package.

DATEV Export

Export financial data in DATEV-compatible CSV format for seamless transfer to your accounting software. Requires DATEV to be configured under Settings.

Contracts & Invoices PRO

Generate and print contracts and invoices as PDF documents from within individual Events:

Daysheets & Itineraries

Print Daysheets and Itineraries for individual Events or in bulk:

Batch printing is available to Admin, Agency and Tourmanagement. Tourmanagement gets exactly the events it is allowed to open anyway.

The content of Daysheets is configurable under Itinerary & Daysheet Settings.

Custom File Names

All exported PDF and spreadsheet files can follow your custom naming conventions. Configure file name patterns under SETTINGS using placeholders:

Customizable file names are available for: Guest Lists, Daysheets (including Schedule and Custom field), Setlists, Room Lists, Calendars, Contracts, Invoices, Prepayment Invoices, Settlements, Artist Settlements, Presale Exports, and Financial Exports.

The patterns for guest lists and daysheets are under SETTINGS > GUEST LISTS or DAYSHEETS, in the Filename Pattern (PDF) box. Tourmanagement can set them there too, as well as the PDF layout template of the daysheets. All other patterns are set by Admin and Agency.

J.SHOW PRO Basics: From Deal to Profit

The PRO Version of J.SHOW allows you to fully manage the financial side of a tour — from initial contract setup to final artist billing. Below is the recommended step-by-step flow for setting up, tracking, and settling a tour using the PRO tools:

➀ Create the Contract

Go to EVENTS > select your Event > open the CONTRACT tab.
This is where you define all key financial details:

This contract forms the agreement between the Agency (or Artist) and the Local Partner. Contracts between Agency and Artist are not handled inside J.SHOW.

See section: Contract

➁ Track Weekly Presales

Go to EVENTS > PRESALES. The UPCOMING filter shows current Events.
Update weekly sales per ticketing system.

See section: Tracking Weekly Presales

➂ Enter Planned & Actual Expenses

Go to FINANCES > EXPENSES
Enter all planned and confirmed costs per Event, or apply a Finance Template.

See section: Expenses

➃ Create a Settlement Package

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES
Group multiple Events together (e.g. for a tour). The system will now calculate:

See section: Finance

➄ Finalize & Generate Settlement

Close the presale, finalize all expenses, and print the financial breakdown.
You can now issue invoices to:

Access to PRO Features

By default:
The PRO area (contracts, expenses, financial figures, quota) is always visible to users with Admin or Agency permission rights.
The Presale box in the Event Overview is controlled independently through its own visibility setting.

Enabling additional permission levels:
Go to SETTINGS > PERMISSIONS and locate the 'PRO' box. It offers two checkboxes:
visible for artists — people with Artist permission see the PRO area and additionally get the finance overview (invoices, settlement packages) in the main navigation.
visible to the respective Tourmanagement — tour management sees the PRO area only for events where the person is part of the travel party: view contract and settlement, expenses, quota. Creating invoices and settling remains reserved for admins and the agency.

In the same box you will also find Travel party can enter and view their own expenses — this option applies independently of the PRO visibility above.

To fully hide PRO content from a specific person:
Go to their User Profile and check the box 'PRO invisible' — that person will then see neither the Contract tab nor contract templates, the presale overview, or any other presale and attendance figures.

Tip: In the event list view, clicking the left-side columns opens the Event Overview — while the right-side columns take you directly to the CONTRACT section.

Venue Avails

The Venue Avails sheet is a shared worksheet between you and the local partner (promoter/agent) to clarify before contract negotiations which venue is available on which day. The partner does not need a J.SHOW account — they work through a public link.

Each sheet is a grid of up to four venues (main venue + up to three alternatives, as stored on the event) × all date options of the event (main date and date alternatives). Each cell shows separately what the venue reports for that day and what you have agreed with it — you comment directly in the sheet, and once you have agreed, you apply the confirmation as an event with a single click.

Platform note: The tool is available in the desktop version of the artist platform to users with Admin or Agency permission rights — no PRO required. The partner sees the sheet in a simple, public browser view — including on a smartphone.

How to reach it: Open Routing from the event list and switch to the VENUE AVAILABILITIES tab — this works without PRO. In addition, once a sheet exists and the event is still in the Idea stage, a VENUE AVAILS tab appears directly on the event for quick access.

Create a sheet

For a sheet to be useful, the event should have a main venue and optionally further venue alternatives as well as date alternatives (alternative days) if needed.

Go to EVENTS > pick the event > open the tab VENUE AVAILS.
If no sheet exists yet, J.SHOW first asks: 'What kind of sheet do you need?'

'+ One event' — find the venue and date for exactly this event. Applying the confirmations turns it into the event and closes the sheet.

'+ Several events (bulk request)' — for one partner, region or tour leg: every confirmation creates its own event, and the sheet stays open.

The sheet starts with the current venue alternatives and date options of the event. In the 'Type of sheet' box you can switch the type as long as no event has been created from the sheet yet.

You can add more date options directly in the sheet via + Add day. To remove a single day, use the ✕ in the date column. Further venues are added via the list on the left side.

Picking several days in the calendar: + Add day opens a calendar on the right-hand edge. The sheet moves aside and stays in view with all its responses. The days already in the sheet are marked in the calendar. Click every day you want to add; clicking a marked day takes it out again. Below the calendar you can see how many days the sheet will have afterwards. With 'save', J.SHOW applies everything in one step. If entries would be lost, J.SHOW asks first and tells you how many there are and how many of them came from the partner. The event's own date always stays in the sheet, and a sheet holds at most 200 days.

Deleting several days at once: In the sheet's title row, click Select days, then click the date of each day you want to remove. When you click 'delete', J.SHOW first tells you how many entries will be removed — and how many of them came from the partner. This can't be undone. At least one day has to stay in the sheet.

Whole date ranges at once: + Add date range opens a window where you pick From–To and use the Weekdays chips to restrict which days are created (e.g. only Friday + Saturday). A live counter shows how many new days will be added; existing days are skipped automatically.

Managing venues: Via + Add venue you search for further venues and add them to the sheet — up to 100 venues per sheet. The search also finds stages; they appear as Venue – Stage.

Preferred venues: Use the star (★) next to a venue's name to mark it as a Preferred venue. This marking is used, for example, in tour routing to steer preferred venues deliberately.

Invite the partner

At the top of the sheet you'll find the public link — copy it with Copy and send it by email. Alternatively, let J.SHOW send the invitation directly.

Enter one or more email addresses of the partner in the Contact person email field (confirm each with + Add).

Click Send Invitation. The partner receives an email in their language (derived from the deal language or from their browser) containing the public link and a short explanation.

In the Notify field, you store email addresses of your internal colleagues who should be informed as soon as the partner changes anything in the sheet. The suggestion list is drawn automatically from all admin and agency users of your platform. Replies to this email go to the partner — to the first address the sheet was sent to.

Using the grid

Each cell of the grid represents a venue × day combination and shows two things separately: the color says what the venue reports, the badge in the cell what you have agreed with it. A legend below the sheet explains every value in one sentence.

What the venue reports — 'What's available on this day?'

What you have with the venue — clicking the cell opens the window for it:

The top of the window always shows what the venue currently reports and where the tour would stand. If the tour holds a claim on a day the venue reports as Unavailable, a ⚠ conflict note points this out — nothing is changed, you decide.

Option deadline: An option can carry a deadline ('Option valid until'). The cell shows it as “until DD.MM.”, and once it has passed as ⚠ Deadline passed. The option still stays in place until someone changes it.

Entering on behalf of the venue: If a report came by email or phone, click Enter as venue in the title row and enter it on the venue's behalf — including an option deadline. Your entries are then marked “entered by the tour”. Back to tour view takes you back.

★ single day: In a cell's window you can tick 'Prefer this day in routing'. The day gets a star and works in tour routing like a ★ on the venue — just for that one day. The star is only visible to you; the partner doesn't see it.

Quick entry: The Quick entry button in the title row lets you set values with one click: pick a value from the chip row, then click cells. In the tour view you choose values for your side (Option for us, Confirmed, Release day, Nothing agreed); under Enter as venue the venue's reports. Request booking is deliberately only available in the cell's window, because it sends an email right away.

Sheets created before this split show a one-time notice when first opened: options and confirmations from the previous view were carried over as yours — please take a quick look and confirm with 'Got it'.

Swapping axes: By default, the dates run vertically and the venues sit on top. Swap axes flips the layout (venues as rows, dates on top). Weekends (Saturday + Sunday) are subtly tinted; if there are gaps between two date options, a divider line marks the break.

Each cell can optionally carry a comment, which is shown inside the cell as an info hint. In addition, there is a general comment area below the grid — here you can exchange free-form messages.

The sheet refreshes itself every few seconds as long as you have it open in the foreground. When you switch tabs, live polling pauses and resumes immediately when you come back. Cell statuses and comments save without a page reload — you can keep clicking right away.

Alongside a venue's maximum capacity you can record, for this enquiry, the size you are actually planning for that day — via Plan capacity on the venue's row. The table then shows the planned figure next to the maximum.

You can pick the venue's standard capacity, its seated variant, any further named capacity stored there — or type a figure of your own. A Note (optional) goes with it, something like „ballroom only“ or „preview in the small hall“.

The local partner can enter the figure from their own view as well; the table then marks it entered by the partner. That way nobody has to guess whether a number came from you or from the venue.

Applies to this sheet only – the venue's details stay unchanged. For a genuinely separate room with its own address, a stage of its own is the right tool rather than a planned capacity.

Your own events block days

If one of your platform's own events already falls on a day, the tour isn't available there — in every open sheet and in tour routing. J.SHOW reads this fresh from your events every time you open the sheet; there is nothing to enter.

Which events block? You set this for the whole platform under SETTINGS > VENUE AVAILABILITIES in the 'These events block days' box: one tick each for Confirmed, tbc, option, idea and to be postponed. Confirmed, tbc and option are preset. In each sheet you can deviate from this in the box of the same name ('custom selection').

The partner's view

The partner opens the link in their browser — no login, on a smartphone too. On first access, they enter their name, so you can see in notifications who made the change. After that, they see the same sheet as you do and click a cell: at the top they report under 'What's available on this day?', below that they enter under 'For [artist name]' what the tour gets — Option for the tour (with a deadline 'Option valid until'), Confirmed or No option for the tour. All internal comments that are not explicitly marked as partner-visible stay hidden from them, and so do your stars.

What the partner may enter: They can always report what's available on a day. Whether they may also Enter options for the tour and Confirm bookings is set for the whole platform under SETTINGS > VENUE AVAILABILITIES in the box 'What partners and venues may enter via the link'. In each sheet you can deviate from this in the box of the same name: 'as in settings', 'allowed' or 'not allowed'.

The language of the partner page follows the browser automatically; using the parameter &lang=XX on the URL, the partner can switch between all languages available in J.SHOW.

Once you close the sheet or the event is locked in the contract, the partner page only shows a short notice that the sheet is no longer active.

Digest notifications

So you don't receive an email for every single cell change, J.SHOW bundles changes as a digest and sends them out together — in both directions:

Each recipient only sees changes they did not make themselves. Changes are only sent after a short quiet period — keeping the inbox tidy.

Each summary email lists one line per change: date · venue · what happened — for example a deadline that was set or changed, a deleted option, a confirmed booking request or a released day. If there are many changes, the first 20 are included.

Request booking is the only change that doesn't wait for the summary email: the person handling it at the venue immediately gets a separate high-priority email.

Deadline reminders: If an option carries a deadline, the addresses under 'Notify' get a reminder two days before it expires and one more email once it has passed — exactly once per cell and stage. Setting a new deadline starts over. Nothing is released automatically: the option stays until you decide.

Apply confirmations

As soon as at least one cell is set to Confirmed (whether by the partner or by you internally), the Confirmations block appears at the top of the sheet with a summary and the green button Apply confirmations.

Type “One event” — on click the following happens:

A closed sheet can be reopened at any time (Reopen) or archived from the overview.

Type “Several events (bulk request)”: Each confirmation without an event becomes its own event, and the partner is notified. The sheet stays open, other confirmations stay in place, and the link for the venues stays active. The cell then shows 'Event' with its status as a link. New events take over the planned capacity from the sheet.

When you are done with the bulk request, click Close request at the top. The link for the venues is then no longer active; Reopen brings it back. If options or booking requests without an event are still open, J.SHOW asks whether to release them and notify the venues — Cancel leaves them open.

The event keeps its cell up to date

Once an event has been created from a cell, the two stay linked. If something then changes on the event, J.SHOW updates the cell by itself — and the venue learns about it via the summary email:

If you have set the cell differently by hand, it stays that way — it is only updated when something changes on the event. Conversely, a partner's entry never changes your event.

Overview of all sheets

When you are on the VENUE AVAILS tab without a specific event selected (e.g. from the event list), you see an overview list of all sheets on your platform — with filters for All, Open, Closed and Archived. From there you can quickly find sheets in which the partner has recently been active.

Master overview: Next to the filters you switch between List and Master overview. The master overview shows all venues from the selected sheets side by side — venues × days, in the same colors and with the same badges as a single sheet. The status filter applies here too. Past days are hidden at first (Show past days), and Swap axes flips the layout. Cells that no sheet requests are grayed out as 'Not requested'. A requested cell with nothing reported yet stays an open, framed cell as 'No selection'; days with one of your own events are blocked just as in the sheet.

Use the Sort selector in the title bar to order venues by Sheet order (default), Capacity (largest first), Postal code or Name (A–Z); venues without capacity or postal code are listed last. Your browser remembers the choice, and it also applies after Swap axes. Days run continuously, including days no sheet requests – only a gap of more than 31 days (e.g. between two tours) is collapsed and marked with a divider.

Nothing is edited in the master overview: clicking a cell opens the sheet it belongs to.

Tip: From the open availabilities, AI Tour Routing can compute a sensible tour order.

Contract PRO

Note: If you want to apply the same contract structure across multiple Events, use the steps below to create a Contract Template under TEMPLATES > CONTRACT > + NEW TEMPLATE. This is especially helpful for pre-filling recurring sections like text fields, pricing layouts, and default responsibilities.

Contract

Once you’ve created an Event and entered the venue/partner details (e.g. total capacity), go to EVENTS > CONTRACT.

If a partner's address has changed since the event was created, 'Refresh address from partner' fetches today's details. The button takes the data from the partner library rather than from the event's frozen snapshot. Careful: lines you edited by hand here are overwritten — J.SHOW asks first. The same button exists for the invoice recipient.

The contract head also shows the partner's VAT ID, provided it is stored in the partner library.

Start by defining the Contracting Party (usually between Agency/Artist and the local Promoter).

Click in the §1 Contract box.
A ‘Contract’ window will open.

In the text field, you can enter something like: “The Agency provides the following production to the Contracting Partner under the terms outlined below.”
If a venue is already selected, its address, the Act/Artist, and other details will be auto-filled.

You can also add information like Door Time, Start Time, Intermission, End Time, Slot Length, etc.

Income Calculation: Define your price categories and adjust for blocked seats or production kills.

Click the in the ’Income Calculation’ box.

A window titled "Income Calculation: Price Categories & Production Kills / Blocked Seats" will appear.
At the top, you'll see the Total Capacity according to the venue information.

Click + PRICE CATEGORY to define how many tickets can be sold at each pricing tier.

A 'Add Price Category' window will appear.
Define price groups, for example:

Click ADD to finish.
All created price categories will now appear in the table.

Add as many categories as needed.

Click + PRODUCTION KILLS / BLOCKED SEATS to reduce sellable capacity for specific areas, such as FOH (Front of House).

Enter the number of seats lost per price category (e.g. FOH loses 50 in Standard, so Final Sale Capacity = 3950).
Add categories like Guest list — e.g. VIP Guest list = 25, so Final Sale Capacity = 475.
The system will now calculate the projected income per price category using ticket base price and final sale capacity.
In our example:

Set Tax included in ticket price to the applicable percentage (e.g. 0%, 7%, 19%).
The Summary section will display:
Presale capacity (e.g. 4425 tickets)
Tot. Income (net) (e.g. $124,875)
Ø-Price (net) (e.g. $28.22)

The ’Income Calculation’ box now shows your projected earnings for a sold-out show — offering a reliable planning foundation.

There you see Presale capacity, Max Net Income and Ø-Price (net). If ticket fees go to net income in the Distribution of ticket fee revenue box, Tot. Income (net), Max Net Income and Ø-Price (net) include that share — projected to the full presale capacity, as in the ’Current Presales’ box and in the settlement. Without such fees, only the ticket price counts.

Ticket Pricing: Add all relevant fees and calculate final ticket prices for both presale and box office.

Click the in the 'Ticket Pricing' box within the CONTRACT tab.

A window titled 'Ticket Pricing will appear.
This is where you define the final ticket price, including all additional fees such as:

Click + FEE to begin adding fees.

A 'Ticket Pricing: Fee' window will open.
Enter the Description, the Fee Amount, and Currency.
Check if the fee should also apply to Box Office (B.O.) tickets.
For example, you might add a $1.80 booking/service fee per ticket that also applies to the Box Office.
Add as many fees as necessary.
Once added, you will see a complete table displaying:

You can directly type in the Box Office price per category within the table (e.g. Standard B.O. = $30, VIP B.O. = $65).
In this example, the calculated Final Presale Prices are:

This step ensures a clear overview of all fees included in your public ticket pricing — both online and at the door.

Creating a Ticket System: Assign quotas and customize settings for each ticket system you use.

Click + TICKET SYSTEM within the CONTRACT tab to add a new Ticketing Platform for this Event.

A window titled 'Add Ticket System' will appear.

Enter the Name of the ticket system (e.g. Ticketmaster), then click ADD to confirm.
A new window titled 'Ticket System Price Table: [Name]' will now appear.
This table displays all Price Categories alongside their:

Note: If needed, you can manually adjust fees for each ticket type — ideal when different platforms use different fee structures.
Click to reset to the original fees from the main pricing setup.

Disable an individual fee: Per ticket system, each individual fee can be switched off with a checkbox — Disable this fee for this ticket system. Disabled fees drop out of all income, presale, and settlement calculations. The box-office share is unaffected, since the box office is not a ticket system.

In the Presale field, define how many tickets can be sold via this system:

Click the to save and close the window.

Your new ticketing system will now appear as a separate box in the CONTRACT section, labeled: 'TS: [Ticketmaster] (3000)'.
A summary of all presale allocations and calculated values is available in the 'Current Presales' box.
Add as many Ticket Systems as necessary.

If you sell the tickets yourselves rather than through the promoter, tick Presale runs through us on the ticket system. The settlement then treats that income as already received by you and deducts it in the right place, instead of claiming it a second time.

For some ticket systems the sales figures can be fetched automatically instead of being typed in by hand. You need two details on the ticket system for that: the identifier of the event and an access token.

You enter the access under Access (token). If the ticket shop belongs to the partner, enter their token here. It applies to this event only and takes precedence over the token from the settings.

Note: Only the number of tickets sold per day is taken over. Names, addresses and email addresses of ticket buyers are neither fetched nor stored.

Financial Details

To define the financial Deal, click in the Financial Details box.

Changing the revenue share and guarantee headings:
The revenue share heading, for example "Agency revenue share" or "Artist revenue share", is not a fixed choice but text. You can change it for each event, for instance to "Revenue share after costs".

To do so, click in this window next to the heading Split of Net Income (the ? next to it only opens the help). Enter your text in the Revenue share title field and click SAVE. The guarantee works the same way: next to its heading, field Guarantee title. An empty field brings back the default heading.

Your title then appears in the contract, on screen and in the PDF, and on the invoice, where it replaces the words "Revenue share" in the "Performance Fee" line: "Performance Fee (Guarantee versus Revenue share)" becomes "Performance Fee (Guarantee versus Revenue share after costs)". This also applies to an invoice that has already been created; a finalized invoice no longer changes. The settlement for the event keeps the default wording. For linked events with a shared contract, the title applies to the whole contract.

The title only changes the text, not the calculation. If costs are to be deducted before the revenue share, enter them under Direct Disposals Before Split. The Break-even threshold on a revenue share tier does not deduct any costs either; it only changes the text in the contract.

Direct Disposals Before Split

In some cases, part of the net income must be deducted before any revenue split is calculated — for example, to cover fixed production costs or other agreed-upon expenses. These deductions can be entered here.

Click in the Direct disposals of net income before division box to open the input window.

In the pop-up window:

Each defined item will be deducted from the net income before the percentage split is applied. This adjusted amount is what will be used for the split.

Ticket Fee Distribution

To define exactly how the ticket service fees are split between the Artist and the local Partner:

Click in the Distribution of Ticket Fee Revenue box.

Ticket fees and the Booking Fee: A share for Act / Artist / Agency is additional revenue on top of the performance fee. No Booking Fee is calculated on it, and no commission on third-party money packages. In the third-party money settlement it appears as “Additional Revenue w/o Commission”.

To make the fee count, enter its share under to net income, for example 100%. It then runs through the deal like the ticket revenue, and the Booking Fee applies to whatever additionally reaches the artist as performance fee.

Note: This only works while the revenue share applies. With a guarantee only, or while the guarantee is higher than the revenue share, the performance fee does not rise, and the artist receives nothing from this share.

Exception: With the basis Profit (see Adjusting the Booking Fee Percentage), a direct share is part of the profit and carries the Booking Fee. In the third-party money settlement it then appears as “Additional Revenue with Commission”.

Service Overview / Additional Costs / Buyouts

To define any additional costs or buyouts such as hotel, catering, GEMA, KSK, stage tech, press, etc.

Click in the Service Overview / Additional Costs / Buyouts box.

Click to add a new category.

Forecast Card: Other revenue & additional costs

Below the deal, the contract view shows a separate card "Other revenue & additional costs". The card consolidates all relevant additional income items (such as ticket fee shares for artist, agency and promoter) as well as the expected additional costs in a single overview. Values are displayed both for the current state (based on the ticket sales already entered) and as a forecast — broken down per recipient or cost type (fixed amount, approximate, per ticket, percentage).

Note: The forecast values are calculated automatically from the contract and the configured pre-sale data — no additional configuration is required.

§5–§15 Text Fields

All sections from §5 (Payment Method) to §15 (Final Provisions) are customizable text fields.

Note: Only fields that have been filled out will appear in the final contract PDF, and they will be numbered dynamically as individual paragraphs (e.g. §1, §2, §3...).
Empty sections are skipped automatically and do not receive a paragraph number.

Since many contracts use the same clauses repeatedly, text field templates can be created under TEMPLATES > CONTRACT > + NEW TEMPLATE.
These templates can include pre-formatted standard language across all text field sections.

Formatting Rules:
(#) creates a new paragraph with numbering (e.g. 1)
(##) creates a sub-paragraph (e.g. 1.1)
(#) restarts main paragraph (e.g. 2), etc.

The following sections are included:

If you already know you won’t be using certain sections of the contract, you can hide them entirely to keep things tidy.

Go to SETTINGS > CONTRACTS > ‘Use Text Fields’ box.
Uncheck any sections that don’t apply to your typical contracts.
Unchecked fields will no longer appear in the Contract interface or final PDF unless reactivated.

Payment Terms in the Contract

Below the Payment method, you can keep a Due date list in the contract — with the same kind of rows as on the invoice: a percentage or a fixed amount, due on a fixed date or a set number of days before or after the Event.

Click + Add due date to add a row. The rows appear in the contract view and in the contract PDF, below the free text.

When you create a new invoice for this Event, the payment terms from the contract are already filled in (relative due dates are converted based on the event date) — instead of the one default row. Invoices that have already been saved stay unchanged.

Without payment term rows nothing changes — contract, PDF and invoice stay as before. The rows also apply to linked events (on the contract of the first Event) and to the dual contract; when you duplicate an Event, they are copied along with it.

Printing

To print the final Contract PDF:

Navigate to Event Overview > CONTRACT.

Click on CONTRACT — a Contract PDF will be generated in a separate window.

To change the title in the Contract per individual Event:

Go to Event Overview > CONTRACT > SETTINGS
In the ‘Contract Title’ field, enter your custom title (e.g. “Engagement Contract”).

Click the to auto-save your changes.

Contract Settings

To define which financial tables to include in the final contract PDF.

Go to SETTINGS > CONTRACTS > ‘Print in contract’ box.

Check all applicable sections you want to print (Income Calculation, Ticket Pricing, Financial Details, Service Overview).

Optional setting: Check “For ticket fees in %, additionally print the actual amount”
This will include a calculated actual dollar amount alongside percentage-based fees in the PDF.

To globally change the title or named parties in the Contract:

Go to SETTINGS > CONTRACTS
In the ‘Labels in the contract’ box, enter your desired title in the ‘Contract title’ field (e.g. “Show Agreement” or “Performance Contract”).

Specify the names of the Partner, Artist, and Agency — along with the name of a legal representative.

To define which additional information appears in the contract:

Under SETTINGS > CONTRACTS > 'Print in contract', you'll find the following options:

Contract Layout

You can customize the appearance of your contracts by uploading graphics for the header and footer.

Go to SETTINGS > CONTRACTS.
In the 'Upload Header' and 'Upload Footer' boxes, click Choose a file and select the desired image from your computer.

Click UPLOAD to complete the process.

Below the uploaded image you can see whether it fits the area of the PDF. If it is too tall, the PDF scales it down until it is fully visible instead of cutting it off; with Align you then choose whether it sits left, center or right. How tall an image may be at most for the full width is shown below the field. This applies to contracts and settlements.

Additionally, you can create a formatted text footer using the editable text field in the 'Footer' box.

You can also upload a signature graphic via the 'Upload Signature' box (follow the same steps as for header and footer).
The uploaded signature will appear automatically in the designated signature field on the contract.

Note: The uploaded signature image is not a digital signature in the legal sense. For legally binding digital signatures, DocuSign can be connected under SETTINGS > DocuSign.

Contract Templates

To create a new Contract Template:

Navigate to TEMPLATES > CONTRACT > + NEW TEMPLATE
You’ll see a blank contract layout where you can pre-fill any of the above sections (click on either TEXT FIELDS and TABLES).
Templates are ideal for recurring contract setups, ensuring consistency and saving time.

Note: When applying a Contract Template to an Event, all pre-defined Text Fields will automatically populate the Contract.
However, any Tables (and newly created categories within them) included in the Template must be manually added inside the respective tables in the Contract after the Template has been applied. Simply click on next to each category you wish to include in the current Contract.

There are two ways to apply a Contract Template to a specific Event:

➀ From the Template Section:

Go to TEMPLATES > CONTRACT and select your desired template.

Click APPLY TO EVENTS and choose all relevant Events from the event list.

Then click APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS to finish.

➁ From within the Event:

Go to EVENTS > CONTRACT > TEMPLATE
A Choose a Template window will appear.

Select your desired Contract Template from the list.
A warning will prompt you to confirm before overwriting any existing contract content.

Click YES to apply the template.

Placeholders in Contract Templates

You can use placeholders in the text fields of your Contract Template. These are automatically replaced with the actual values of the respective Event when the contract is printed.

Click the {P} button in any text field to open the placeholder dropdown.

System Placeholders (marked in blue) — replaced automatically:

Custom Placeholders (marked in red):

You can also create your own placeholders by wrapping any text in curly braces — e.g. {Promoter Name}. These are not replaced automatically but serve as reminders to fill in manually when printing the contract.

Linking Events

You can link multiple Events (e.g. for a double show, residencies, or multi-night runs) in order to combine their contract and billing documents.
This feature allows for streamlined handling of deals where several shows run under a shared agreement.

Go to EVENTS > CONTRACT of one of the Events you wish to link.

Click on the icon inside the §1 Contract box.
In the 'Contract' window you will find the box Linked events — click + LINK EVENT there.

Select the relevant Event from the event list. Repeat the step to add more Events to the same contract.

Once linked:

Venue per linked Event

Every linked Event keeps its own Venue. In the contract editor, the venue field always edits the venue of the currently opened Event — not a shared one.

When two or more Events are linked, the printed contract shows a compact schedule list directly under the artist line, with one row per Event: date (with short weekday, e.g. Mon/Tue/Wed), venue inline, and capacity. The capacity column disappears automatically when no capacity is set on any of the linked Events. Times, slot and other deal details continue to be taken once from the main Event below the schedule.

The linked-events list in the contract editor is shown in full width across both columns, with one row per Event: × to remove the link, the date (click to jump to that Event's contract editor) and a venue preview.

Settle events individually PRO

By default, a group of linked events receives one joint settlement, invoice, and payout. Alternatively, you can switch to separate billing per contract: one shared contract with shared contract texts — but all financial content (guarantee, share, additional costs, fees …) is recorded separately and settled individually for each event.

Open the 'Contract' window and activate the option Settle events individually in the Linked events box.

A badge next to the Financial Details title shows the active mode: Only this event (separate billing) or All linked events (joint billing). Clicking the ? next to it opens a detailed explanation.

With separate billing, each event is closed and settled individually — including its own fee and share forecast per event.

If linked events already have invoices, J.SHOW points this out and asks for confirmation when you switch back to joint billing. The invoices stay with their event and keep using that event's own financial data.

Transferring financial data: Use Copy financial data to linked events to copy the open event's data to all linked events. In the 'Copy contract data' window you choose what gets copied — Financials (guarantee, share, tax), Positions (additional costs, fees, share tiers, deductions, extra income), and optionally Contract texts — and whether existing data on the target dates is replaced or added (duplicates are skipped). Locked events remain untouched.

In the printed contract, the Financial Details chapter is not repeated per event with separate billing. Instead, it is printed as one clean chapter in the industry-standard fee-schedule style — with one line per event if, for example, only the fee differs, plus the Total of all events. From six events onward, the breakdown moves to a dedicated Annex 1: Event Schedule.

Items of several events on one invoice: With separate billing, the invoice editing window lets you pick up items of the other linked events under Open Billing Items — the + button carries the respective event date, and an ℹ icon next to it shows the show name and venue. The events must use the same currency; the positions are listed separately per event on the invoice.

One deposit invoice for several events: Even with separate billing, not every event needs its own deposit invoice. In the deposit invoice editing window you can also pick the items of the other linked events, each with its date. The events do have to use the same currency.

Advance payments per event: With separate settlement, each linked event has its own “Advance Payments” area under CONTRACT. What you enter there belongs only to that event and only counts in its settlement; the advance payments PDF also shows only that event's payments. Entries created before this change remain with the first event of the group. With joint settlement, there is still one shared area for all linked events.

Deal Memo

With the Deal Memo you can send the key facts of a deal as a personalized email directly from the contract view — to the promoter, the venue or internal recipients. Texts, signature and attachments can be pre-defined in templates so sending only takes a few clicks.

Desktop: Go to EVENTS > CONTRACT. The contract view has its own Deal Memo section with the Send Deal Memo button. Once a memo has been sent, the section shows the date, status and number of recipients of the last one instead, and its title bar holds Resend Deal Memo and History. The section does not appear if the contract is handled externally.

Mobile / App / Agency platform: The Deal Memo is currently only available on Desktop of the Artist platform.

Sending a Deal Memo

After clicking Send Deal Memo, a window opens with the following sections:

With Send Test you can send a test email to your own address before the real delivery. Then click Send to deliver the Deal Memo to the selected recipients. Every send is logged with date, sender and recipients and can be opened via History in the Deal Memo section.

Configure the Delivery Method

The Deal Memo can be sent either via the J.SHOW email infrastructure (Mailgun) or via your own SMTP server. Your own mail server is recommended when the memo should go out under your own company domain.

Desktop: Go to SETTINGS > CONTRACTS > section Deal Memo.

Choose between J.SHOW Email and Custom mail server.

If you pick your own mail server, fill in Sender Name, Sender Email, Reply-To, SMTP Server, Port, Encryption, Username and Password. Use Test Connection to verify that the configuration works.

In the Signature field, set the signature text that is automatically appended to every Deal Memo email.

Creating Deal Memo Templates

Subject, message body and attachments are maintained in separate Deal Memo templates. Each contract template can store subject and message in all supported languages. The version sent is the one in the language selected in the contract's 'Language' box — the inserted placeholders such as weekday, deal description and percentages also appear in that language, whichever language you are using J.SHOW in. The same applies to the cover letter when sending via DocuSign.

Desktop: Go to TEMPLATES > CONTRACT, pick an existing template or create a new one, and click the Deal Memo tab.

Pick the language from the dropdown, enter the Subject and Message, and use the quick buttons to insert placeholders. In the Attachments section, up to 5 files (max. 10 MB per file) can be uploaded — they will be automatically attached to every send.

Note: When sending, the language configured in the deal template selection or in the contract is used automatically.

Digital Signing with DocuSign

J.SHOW is integrated with DocuSign, so contracts can be signed digitally and legally binding directly from the platform.

To send a contract for digital signing:

Go to EVENTS > CONTRACT. Next to the other contract buttons, a button Send contract via DocuSign appears (or Send again if a contract has already been sent once).

In the window that opens, add the recipients (artist, venue, agency or any other party). For each recipient, enter name and email; you can also define the signing order.

Use the Signing Order dropdown to choose who signs first:

Enter an email subject (default: "Contract for signing") and click Send for signature. The contract is generated as a PDF and dispatched to all recipients for electronic signature — every person receives an email with a link to sign. In your DocuSign account the envelope is named like the contract file (pattern under Custom File Names); the subject is used for the email to the recipients. This requires the setting for a custom email and language per recipient in your DocuSign account (Enable custom email and language for each recipient); if it is off, J.SHOW still sends the contract and the envelope carries the subject as before.

To track signing status:

The contract section shows the current status: Created, Sent, Delivered, Signed, Declined or Voided. Per recipient, the individual status is shown together with the timestamp.

With Refresh status you can re-fetch the status manually. As soon as all parties have signed, the completed contract is available via Signed PDF for download.

Use Void to cancel an ongoing signing process. You will be asked for a void reason; all recipients are then automatically notified.

To connect DocuSign to your platform:

Go to SETTINGS > Integrations > DocuSign and click CONNECT TO DOCUSIGN to authorize with DocuSign via OAuth2. Once connected, the dispatch is available on every contract on the platform.

Note: The Integrations submenu holds DATEV, DocuSign, and Box Sign side by side. The DocuSign configuration is available both under Agency Settings and in the Artist platform settings. Each platform connects its own DocuSign account.

Cover message to the recipients: The send window has the Message to recipients field. The text appears in the email from DocuSign together with the link to the contract — for example a note on how to forward the contract if you are not signing yourself. The field is prefilled with your template and can be changed for every dispatch.

You create the template under SETTINGS > Integrations > DocuSign in the Cover message box; it is saved as soon as you leave the field. The box appears once DocuSign is connected. If you leave it empty, your agency's cover message applies (it is then shown in gray in the field).

In the cover message you can use the same placeholders as in the Deal Memo, for example {artist}, {title}, {showdate}, {venue} and {city}. They are replaced with the event's details as soon as the send window opens — so you see and edit the finished text.

Connection expired? If a saved DocuSign connection can no longer be used, the contract shows the red message ‘The connection to DocuSign has expired. Please reconnect DocuSign.’ instead of the DocuSign dispatch – for a connection of your Artist Platform together with the Connect to DocuSign button. The DocuSign settings of the Artist Platform then show this message instead of ‘Connected to DocuSign’ as well. Connecting again replaces the old connection.

Platform note: The DocuSign dispatch is currently available on the Artist platform on Desktop.

Digital Signing with Box Sign

Alongside DocuSign, J.SHOW supports Box Sign as a second e-signature provider. Both providers can be connected in parallel — you decide per contract which one to dispatch through.

To connect Box Sign to your platform:

Go to SETTINGS > Integrations > Box Sign and click Connect to Box to authorize with Box.

To send a contract via Box Sign:

Go to EVENTS > CONTRACT. Next to the other contract buttons, Send contract via Box Sign appears.

You sign first, then the contract automatically goes to the recipients.

You track the status (sent, viewed, signed) just like with DocuSign, right in the contract section of the event.

Platform note: Box Sign is a PRO feature; connecting is done by Admin or Agency.

Presales PRO

Once you've created an Event and added the venue information — including total capacity and other relevant details — you're ready to navigate to the CONTRACT tab in the Event Overview and begin setting up your Ticket Systems and Income Projections.

➀ Income Calculation: Define your price categories and adjust for blocked seats or production kills.

For a full breakdown, please visit Income Calculations in the Contract section.

➁ Ticket Pricing: Add all relevant fees and calculate final ticket prices for both presale and box office.

For a full breakdown, please visit Ticket Pricing in the Contract section.

➂ Creating a Ticket System: Assign quotas and customize settings for each ticket system you use.

For a full breakdown, please visit Ticket Systems in the Contract section.

➃ Tracking Weekly Presales: Monitor and export weekly sales data across all active systems.

Before entering any weekly numbers, set your cutoff weekday for tracking new sales data:

Go to SETTINGS > TICKETS
In the 'Presale' box, define the field “New number of sales every” by selecting a weekday (default: Monday).

Note: Changing this setting after entering sales data may cause previously logged presale figures to be displayed incorrectly or calculated inaccurately.

Once this is set, navigate to EVENTS > PRESALES.

The Event you created above with an active Ticketing System will now appear in the presale list.
This is where you can manually update weekly ticket sales per system.

The presale list only shows events that are announced – or that, as tba, have reached their publication time. If an event should appear there before it is publicly announced, tick the Show in presales overview anyway box on the event:

Desktop: EVENTS > CONTRACT – below the ticket systems, directly under the + TICKET SYSTEM button. Above it, in italics: This event has not been made public yet.

The event then appears in the presale list and in the presale exports (PDF report and Excel/CSV). On your website, in the calendar and in the announcements it stays hidden – there the status in the Basic information still decides.

Note: Only Admin and Agency see the box, and only while the event is not public and at least one ticket system has Presale Active ticked. It does not exist in the mobile view. Once the event is announced, the box disappears. Its value stays saved and applies again if the event goes back to not public.

With only empty in the filter bar you hide every event whose sales figures for this week are already entered – so only what is still missing remains.

For each event, you'll see:

You can also directly adjust the quota or capacity per ticket system inside the presale list.

To make sure your ticket system appears here, the Presale must be activated:

EVENTS > CONTRACT > Click in the 'TS: [Ticket System] (Quota)' box.

Check Presale Active.
If this box is unchecked, the ticket system will not be visible in the presale list.

If you're working with a new ticket system, a bordered 'PRESALE' button will appear inside the newly generated 'TS: [Ticket System]' box.

Click the 'PRESALE' button to enter past sales data.
A window titled 'Enter Presale: [Ticket System]' will appear.

Click ENTER PRESALE NUMBER FROM THE WEEK BEFORE.
You can now enter the total number of tickets sold up until the end of the previous week.

Click SAVE to confirm your entry.

From this point onward, the 'PRESALE' button will only allow entry of current sales data.

Note: A smaller number to the right of 'tickets sold' will indicate the weekly difference from the previous entry.

Automatic Ticket Data Import

For supported ticket systems, J.SHOW can automatically fetch presale data at regular intervals — eliminating the need for manual weekly entry.

Automatic imports are available for select ticketing partners. Contact support@j.show to check if your ticket system supports automated data sync.

Contingent Modes

Under SETTINGS > TICKETS, you can choose between two contingent structures:

➄ Sales Forecast: Estimate final ticket sales based on past trends.

Navigate to EVENTS > OVERVIEW and look for the 'Forecast' column.
Here, you'll see a prediction for how many tickets will be sold by show day — displayed either as a percentage or with a label like 'Sold Out'.

The forecast evaluates your existing presale entries and projects them to show day using a damped trend model (Holt's exponential smoothing).
It works from the weekly increases across your entire recorded presale history — not a fixed time window. The detected trend is dampened a little more with each additional week, so a strong on-sale spike is not extrapolated unchecked over months.

The forecast never falls below your current sales figure and is capped at capacity. If sales are currently flat, it matches your current figure exactly — J.SHOW then expects no further growth. If your last entry is more than two weeks old, it continues with the average of the last four recorded weeks.

Note: The forecast will only begin to calculate once you've entered at least 4 weeks of Presale data.

Additional Options & Export Settings

For a visual representation of overall presales progress:

Go to DASHBOARD and review the 'Sales Statistics' box.

You'll find:

To export weekly Presale Updates:

Go to EVENTS > PRESALE > EXPORT to generate PDF reports.

A window titled 'Export' will appear with the following options:

Click on PRESALE TABLE to begin.
A window titled 'Export presale' will appear.

Click + NEW EXPORT SET to create a custom export set.

In the 'New Export Set' window, enter a description (e.g. Tour Name: Enlightenment Is Overrated) and click SAVE.

Select all relevant Events from the event list and click SAVE again.
A window titled 'Export Presale' will appear with your newly created Export Set available for selection.

Click the export set. The 'Presale report preview' window opens with the finished report. Check it there and click PDF in the top right of the window bar to create the PDF — it opens in a new tab.

The report only lists events with the status announced – and events that are not public but have the Show in presales overview anyway box ticked (see presale list). If events from your export set are missing for that reason, a note at the top of the preview tells you how many — it does not appear in the PDF itself. You change an event's status in the Basic information.

This PDF includes:

To customize the Layout of how Events are grouped in the PDF:

Return to EVENTS > PRESALE > EXPORT.

Click on PRESALE TABLE > next to your Export Set.

In the 'Edit Export Set' window, click + NEW to add Sections.

In the 'Section' window, enter a Description and choose under 'Basis' either 'Date range' with a Beginning and an End, or 'Block' (see below).

Click SAVE to confirm.
When you re-download the Export Set, Events will be grouped accordingly (default grouping = quarterly).

When Events are older than three weeks and still part of an Export Set, they will be grouped by month in the PDF.

To adjust this behavior, go to SETTINGS > TICKETS > 'Export Presale PDF' box
and set: “Group past events older than [x] days into months”

Section based on a tour block: In the 'Section' window you enter a Description and choose under 'Basis' how the section is formed:

'Date range' — you set a Beginning and an End (as described above).
'Block' — you pick one of your tour blocks. If you leave the description empty, the block's name is used.

All Events assigned to the block are then automatically part of the Export Set — including those you assign to the block later. You no longer need to add them by hand, and when the block gets longer, the section grows with it; no new section is needed. In the 'Edit Export Set' window, the number of Events is followed by how many of them are included automatically, and in the list of Sections such a section is marked Block.

To take out a single Event of the block, click next to the Export Set, deselect the Event and click SAVE. It stays out until you check it there again.

Note: Only tour blocks that do not have a section in this Export Set yet are offered; blocks with the No tour option do not appear. When editing a block section, only the description can still be changed. Included automatically are the Events assigned to the block (via Select Events on the block), not Events that merely fall within the block's period by date. If the block is deleted, the section shows Block deleted and no longer contains any Events.

Color Codes in the Export PDF:
Blue = Sold Out
Green = Recently changed (e.g., updated info, quota adjusted, postponed)

To define how long a change is marked green, go to:

SETTINGS > TICKETS > 'Export Presale PDF' box
and set: “Mark postponed and new events in green up to [x] days after the postponement or creation”

If you do not want an Event to appear color-coded (e.g. blue for sold out) in the exported PDF, you can manually reset its status:

In EVENTS > PRESALES, go the relevant Ticket System.

Click the dropdown, choose any option from the list, then reselect the empty/default option at the top.
This removes the color status and resets the Event’s export appearance back to default black text.

Note: This is useful if there was an error in the Event status, e.g. sold out, but want to neutralize that label in the PDF output.

You can further customize the PDF output in the 'Export Presale PDF' box, by checking these options:

In the presale list EVENTS > PRESALES

You can manually write internal comments for each Ticket System that will appear in the Export PDF:

Go to EVENTS > PRESALES > click on the relevant Ticket System, and enter your comment.

To manually mark a Ticket System as sold out:

Click on the dropdown menu in the presale list and select 'Sold Out'.

By default, canceled Events appear crossed-out only once in the next PDF Export. Opening the preview does not count as an export.

If you'd like them to be printed in every export, select: 'Canceled (print in PDF always)'.

Finance & Billing PRO

This chapter covers all financial tools available with J.SHOW PRO — from tracking expenses and forecasting profits, to generating partner and artist settlements.

Expenses PRO

Planned Expenses

To manually add Expenses for an Event:

Go to EVENTS > select your Event > open the EXPENSES tab.

Inside the 'Planned Expenses' box, click to enter a new line item:

The total sum of all Planned Expenses will appear at the bottom of the box (e.g. $450).

Having a quote or receipt read: Instead of filling in the line by hand, you can upload a quote, a cost estimate or a receipt. J.SHOW reads the file and suggests planned expenses from it.

Desktop: In the 'Planned Expenses' box, click ('Upload quote or receipt') and choose the file (JPG, PNG, WebP, HEIC or PDF, at most 10 MB). This works on the event in the EXPENSES tab and in the settlement package.

An “Import from quote” window shows what would be created: category, description and net amount per line. If the quote is broken down by trade (e.g. lighting, sound, transport), one line is created per trade; a discount is spread proportionally. If the receipt shows several tax rates, one line is created per rate.

Under “Optional items – not included in the total” you'll find optional and alternative items; they are not ticked. Under “Notes from the quote – not imported” you'll find, for example, payment terms or costs without a fixed figure.

Tick what you want to take over and click 'apply'. The file is then attached to the new lines. With 'cancel', nothing is created.

If you upload the file to an existing planned expense, J.SHOW only fills in the fields there that are still empty.

For a quote in a foreign currency, the net amount is converted into the platform's currency; the original amount is added to the description. If the conversion fails, the amount stays empty and you enter it yourself.

If the file cannot be read, it is still saved as a new, empty planned expense.

Reading uses credits from the AI quota. Only people with full access to the expenses have this feature. The mobile view has no planned expenses.

Actual Expenses

To confirm a cost has actually occurred:

Click next to the relevant line item.

This will move it to the 'Actual Expenses' box on the right, where you can now enter:

The Actual Expenses total will update automatically.

Having a receipt read: You don't have to type up a receipt. If you upload a photo or a PDF, J.SHOW reads the supplier, description, date, invoice number, amount, tax rate and category and enters them into the expense. The receipt is attached to the line.

Desktop: In the 'Actual Expenses' box, click ('Upload receipt'). A new expense is created from the file. If you upload a receipt to an existing expense, it is read as well, and the recognized details are entered into that line. This works on the event in the EXPENSES tab and in the settlement package.

Mobile: On the event under EXPENSES, tap 'Upload receipt' — at the top for a new expense, or on an existing expense.

If the receipt shows several tax rates (e.g. a hotel with accommodation and breakfast), a separate expense is created per rate. J.SHOW converts a receipt in a foreign currency into the platform's currency; if that fails, “Currency conversion failed” appears — then check the amount yourself.

If the receipt cannot be read, it is still saved as a new expense; you then enter the amount and details yourself.

Reading uses credits from the AI quota. Once a settlement is finalized, its actual expenses can no longer be changed — not via a receipt either.

Cost type: Besides the category, every planned and actual expense has a Cost type field with Local costs, Tour costs, Internal costs and Recharged to artist. The field can also stay empty.

Local costs and Tour costs are just a label: the total boxes show subtotals for them, and the expenses CSV export has a column of its own.

The agency bears Internal costs in full. They are not part of the artist settlement (nor the third-party money settlement), but they count towards the agency’s result. If the artist advanced such an expense, it is reimbursed in full.

Recharged to artist is the counterpart: the expense does not count towards the profit before the split (so it is not part of the basis of a booking fee calculated on profit either), but is taken in full from the artist’s share after the booking fee — even if the agency otherwise covers the costs of this category. In the artist settlement and on the PROFIT tab of the settlement package it is shown as a separate line after the booking fee.

When you move a planned expense to the actual expenses, its cost type comes along.

Mobile: On the event under EXPENSES, every expense has the Cost type field as well.

Only people with full access to the expenses can see and change the cost type. Travel party members who only maintain their own expenses don’t see the field.

If you work with several Billing Entities, the 'Payment method' field of an actual expense lets you pick which billing entity paid, e.g. Cash (name of the billing entity). The (Agency) choice stays available alongside. Planned expenses, and platforms with only one billing entity, keep the usual choice.

The rows can be put into an order of your own: grab a row by the handle on the left and drag it up or down. The new order is saved immediately and applies to everyone who sees the event.

The same works in the Planned Expenses column next to it; the two columns keep their order separately.

The rows also sit a little further apart than before, which makes dragging easier to hit and longer descriptions easier to read.

Expenses as PDF

The expenses can be output as a PDF — with the 'Expenses as PDF' button below an Event's expenses and in both button bars of the Settlement Package (manual package and monthly package). Only people with full access to the expenses see the button.

A small window asks two things, both preset to everything:

With 'Create PDF', the PDF opens in a new tab. It shows one table per kind (planned, actual) with the total and subtotals per cost type. In the settlement package it is broken down into general expenses and individual Events, with an overall block. The selected filter is shown in the header; if a filter is applied, the PDF points out that the totals only cover the items shown. The order follows the list (your own order or the most recently chosen sorting).

Visualizing Expense Data

To see a chart comparing Planned vs. Actual spending:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > EXPENSES CHART
Pie and bar charts will appear, clearly visualizing costs across categories.

Using Finance Templates

To avoid entering the same expenses for each Event manually, create a Finance Template.

Go to TEMPLATES > FINANCES > + NEW TEMPLATE.

In the 'Planned Expenses' box, click to enter planned costs just like above.

Add as many categories as needed — e.g. Travel, Staff, Production, etc.
Click APPLY TO EVENTS.

Select all Events where this template should be applied.

Click APPLY TEMPLATE TO SELECTED EVENTS to confirm.

Note: Applying a template will add its contents to existing Planned Expenses — not replace them.

Finance PRO

Creating a Settlement Package

A Settlement Package allows you to group multiple Events together — e.g. for an entire tour.

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES.

Click + CREATE SETTLEMENT PACKAGE.

Give it a Name, e.g. “Tour: Enlightenment is Overrated.”

Click SAVE.

Select all relevant Events from the event list, then click SAVE again.

If an Event is in its automatic monthly package and that package is locked by a finalized commission/expense invoice, it stays there. After saving, the package shows how many Events were not added for this reason.

The same applies the other way round: if an Event you remove from the package would fall into such a locked monthly package, it stays in the package; after saving, the package shows how many Events were not removed for this reason. A package with such Events cannot be deleted. The Events of a locked monthly package themselves can no longer be changed in fee, deal, additional costs and expenses; you can still move the date.

A commission/expense invoice that has been transferred to DATEV but not yet finalized also locks its package. Changes are then only possible via a credit note and a new invoice.

Your new package will now appear in SETTLEMENT PACKAGES.

Click on EXPENSES (located between INCOME and PROFIT)
You’ll now see a breakdown of Planned Expenses per Event.

To enter expenses that are not tied to individual Events, use the "General [Settlement Package]" box.

This is ideal for overarching costs such as:

To finalize any costs, click to move a Planned Expense to Actual Expenses.

Adding whole blocks to the package

If you are settling a tour, you don't have to tick its events one by one. Open the package, click EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE and, in the window, . In the event list, every tour block has a checkbox of its own ('Add the whole block to the package').

If you tick a block, all its events go into the package, and next to the block it says “All events in this block belong to the package – including ones added later”. Click SAVE. You can tick several blocks; past blocks are in the list too, and 'show past events' shows their events.

As long as the block is ticked, the package follows it: if you later put an event into the block, it is automatically in the package; if you take it out of the block, it also leaves the package. The block's events are ticked and dimmed in the list — you cannot untick them individually. To take one out, untick the block or take the event out of the block.

The header of the package lists the linked blocks under “Linked blocks”.

A block belongs to one package at most; if it is already linked to another one, it is grayed out and names that package (“Belongs to settlement package”). Events that are already in another package are not moved. A finalized package no longer changes. If an event has so far only been in its monthly package, it moves to the block package — unless the monthly package is finalized. Linking blocks is only available for manual packages.

Moving settled packages out of the way

Once a package is fully settled, open it and click Mark as settled. The package selection at the top then shows only open packages. If you open Settlement Packages without choosing one, the newest open package appears.

Settled packages are behind the Settled (N) button — the number tells you how many there are. You can still open any of them from there. Reopen puts a package back among the open ones.

Marking changes no figures and also works for finalized packages. It applies to manual packages, not to the automatic monthly packages.

Viewing Income Calculations

Your REVENUE section within each Settlement Package reflects expected earnings per Event.

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > select your package > open the REVENUE tab.
This view combines all artist deals per Event with presale income projections and additional earnings (e.g. production subsidies).
See the sections Presales and Contract to understand how these values are generated.

To exclude specific income sources from an artist settlement, please refer to the Exclude Revenue section.

Forecasting Profit

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > open the PROFIT tab.

You’ll see three values:

These allow you to simulate different scenarios and understand your potential net profit per tour or package.

Annual Overview

The Annual overview shows you the revenue, expenses and profit of all settlement packages of a year on one page — with a projection for the whole year.

Go to FINANCES > ANNUAL OVERVIEW.
Choose the year at the top. You can pick every year that has Events, plus the current year.

Every settlement package of the year gets its own row — the automatic monthly packages as well as your manual packages. Below the name you see the period and the number of Events; clicking the name opens the package's PROFIT tab. The As of column says Played once the package's last Event has passed, otherwise Upcoming (forecast).
For Revenue, Expenses and Profit you see the Current value and the Forecast (see Forecasting Profit). The figure shown in bold is the one that goes into the projection: the current figures for played packages, the forecast for upcoming ones. The Total row adds up all packages.

Below that you find the Projection for the year: Played plus Upcoming (forecast) makes the Full year — broken down into revenue, expenses, Booking Fee, Withholding tax, fees, subsidies and profit. Withholding tax, fees, subsidies sums up everything besides revenue, expenses and booking fee that goes into the profit: the deducted withholding tax plus fees and production cost subsidies paid to the artist.

The Annual overview does not calculate anything on its own: every figure is the same as in the PROFIT tab of the respective package, including the booking fee set there. A manual package counts towards the year of its last Event — if it reaches back into the previous year, this is noted below the package name. Special packages are not included, because their income is already part of the other packages.

Note: Like the whole FINANCES area, the Annual overview is a PRO feature and available on desktop.

Third-party shares

If someone outside the show settlement gets a share of the tickets sold — an author, for example, who receives a fixed amount per ticket sold —, you settle this under Third-party shares. J.SHOW adds up the tickets sold at your events and turns them into a Self-billing invoice with its own number, a PDF and a spreadsheet.

Go to FINANCES > THIRD-PARTY SHARES and click + ADD PARTICIPANT. In the “Participant” window you enter name, address, email address, tax number and bank details, and set how the share is calculated:

Click SAVE. A participant who already has self-billing invoices can no longer be deleted — set them to inactive under Status instead.

Creating a settlement

Click CREATE SETTLEMENT at the participant. At the top, choose the period (Events from and To) and the Invoice date. To be settled lists every event in the period whose sale has been closed and that is not yet part of a self-billing invoice for this participant — each with the tickets sold in presale and at the box office, for the percentage types with the basis (net or gross ticket revenue), and with the amount.

If a figure is wrong, overwrite it right in the table. A Reason for correction field then appears below it — without a reason the self-billing invoice cannot be created. The document shows the reason together with the original value. An event that doesn't belong in it moves to the Excluded list with exclude and comes back with include again.

Events whose sale is not closed yet are listed below under Still open – sales not closed (will be included in a later settlement). Nothing is ever settled on a forecast. Canceled events, ideas, options and events without a price category don't count.

Below the table you see the subtotal, the VAT and the Amount credited. Click CREATE SELF-BILLING INVOICE: the document is locked and gets the next number. From then on it can only be canceled, and later changes to the participant or to an event no longer affect it.

Sending and canceling self-billing invoices

Each participant shows their self-billing invoices in a list — with number, date, service period, number of events and the net and gross amount. Next to each one you'll find Preview, PDF, Spreadsheet (a CSV file for Excel), send by email and cancel.

send by email opens a window with recipient, subject and message, prefilled with the participant's details; the PDF is attached. With Copy to me you get a blind copy yourself. Afterwards the list shows when the document was sent.

cancel creates a cancellation document with its own number that reverses the original completely. The events are then free again and can be settled anew.

Number range

Self-billing invoices have their own number range, separate from your invoices. Click NUMBER RANGE: in the Number format, {nr} stands for the sequential number and {jahr} for the year of the document — if the format contains {jahr}, numbering restarts at 1 every year. Under Next sequential number you can continue an existing number range; a number that has already been used is not possible. Next self-billing invoice shows what the next number will look like.

Show settlements, invoices and the DATEV export are not affected by third-party shares. Per participant, an event is part of at most one valid self-billing invoice.

Note: Third-party shares is a PRO feature for admins and the agency, available on desktop.

Partner Billing PRO

Closing a Sale

Once a show is sold out — or after the show date — you can generate the Settlement for the local partner.

Go to the relevant Event > CONTRACT > CLOSE SALE.
A ‘Close Sale’ window will appear.
If the Presale section has been updated, the table (including all ticket systems and box office categories) will already be pre-filled.

Make any necessary changes and click CLOSE.

If not a single ticket was sold at the box office, the settlement leaves out the box office block. To show it anyway, tick Show the box office in the settlement even if no tickets were sold there in the ‘Close Sale’ window. The tick changes no figures and can still be switched after the sale is closed.

Once closed, the button label will change from CLOSE SALE to SALE CLOSED.

Note: You can undo this step at any time by clicking on SALE CLOSED. The same window will reopen. Click UNLOCK to make changes, and then CLOSE again to finalize.

Generating the Final Settlement

Next, in the CONTRACT section, click SETTLEMENT.

A ‘Settlement preview’ window will appear with a preview of the PDF.

The generated PDF will include:

Click PDF to generate the final billing PDF.

Generating Invoices

Advance Invoices

To create an Advance Invoice:

Go to the relevant EVENTS > CONTRACT > INVOICES
A ‘Invoices’ window will appear.

Click on CREATE ADVANCE INVOICE
An ‘Edit Advance Invoice’ window will appear with most fields pre-filled.

You can now add Invoice Items by clicking next to the relevant entries (e.g. Performance Fee, Booking Fee, Flat Fee for Ancillary Costs).
Each item must be filled out manually with the desired amounts.

Adding a free line item

If you need a line for this one invoice only, click Add Line Item below the invoice items. You enter the description, net amount and tax rate directly in the invoice — the contract stays untouched. Previously a line had to exist in the contract before it could go on an invoice.

To finalize an Advance Invoice once a payment has been made:

Go to FINANCES > INVOICES and set the Status of the Advance Invoice to Fully paid.
The payment is added automatically to the 'Advance Payments' box in the CONTRACT section — one entry per invoice item, dated today. If you set the status back, these entries disappear again.

If the Advance Invoice is paid in several instalments, set the status to Partly paid and enter the payment date for each instalment: every paid instalment adds a proportional entry with its date. Once all instalments are paid, the status switches to Fully paid by itself.

Note: To update the payment date, click the next to the entry in the 'Advance Payments' box and adjust the date directly in the 'Edit Advance Payment' window.

Note: If 'External Payment Tracking' is switched on, the invoice list has no status column — the amounts of the Advance Invoice then appear under 'Advance Payments' regardless of whether they have been paid.

To download a PDF of all Advance Payments, click on the in the 'Advance Payments' box.

Invoices

To create an Invoice:

Go to the relevant Event > CONTRACT > INVOICES.
A ‘Invoices’ window will appear.

Click on CREATE INVOICE
An ‘Edit Invoice’ window will appear with most fields pre-filled.

Use the Invoice title field to freely adjust the document's heading — e.g. ‘Final Invoice’. If the field stays empty, the document reads ‘Invoice’ as usual. The title cannot be changed on credit notes.

You can now add Invoice Items by clicking next to the relevant entries under Open Billing Items (e.g. Performance Fee, Service Fee, Flat Fee for Ancillary Costs).

Setting the amount by hand: Every invoice item takes its amount from the contract or the settlement when the invoice is created and keeps it from then on (see An invoice keeps its amounts). If you need a final invoice that differs — because more came in than the guarantee, for instance — you click the amount: the text turns into an input field. The value you enter replaces the amount from the contract and is shown highlighted. An empty field takes today's amount per contract. A deposit that has already been invoiced stays deducted in full — so only the difference falls due.

The value works the same everywhere: in the PDF, in the calculation sheet and in the DATEV export. So you no longer have to bend the contract afterwards to make the invoice add up.

You also have access to a free-text field for custom notes and payment details for both Advance and Final Invoices.

Note: If you'd like this text field to be prefilled by default, go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > ‘Text Template for Payment Details’ and fill out the fields for ‘Invoice’ and ‘Advance Invoice’.

Note: When you manually enter an Invoice Number on an Artist Platform, the system will recognize it and automatically continue the numbering sequence from there for all future invoices generated on that Platform.

Note: If the Invoice Number you enter is already in use in the same numbering source, it is not accepted. The message ‘Invoice number … is already in use in this numbering source. The previous number has been kept.’ appears below the field, and all other entries are saved. This applies to invoices, advance invoices, commission/expense invoices and standalone invoices, on the agency platform as well.

Note: Under SETTINGS > FINANCES > ‘Invoices’ box, you can define default Payment Terms for all invoices — e.g. payment due within 14 days (default setting).

Note: For the Payment Method, in addition to standard options (e.g. bank transfer, direct debit), a custom payment method can be selected. Choose "Other payment method (custom)" from the dropdown and enter the desired description. A long description (more than about 30 characters) appears on the invoice as a separate line below the invoice header.

Note: If Print reverse charge statement is ticked and the recipient's VAT ID is missing or has no country code (e.g. ATU12345678), a red note appears below it: without it, the recipient will reject the XRechnung. This applies to every invoice with this checkbox, including the agency's standalone invoices.

Note: If XRechnung is active and cannot find a country for the recipient, the note "The recipient's country is missing or not recognisable. Without it, the recipient will reject the XRechnung." appears below the Country field. Enter the country before you send the invoice. This applies to invoices, advance invoices, commission/expense invoices and standalone invoices, on the agency platform as well.

To view and print a PDF version of either Advance or Final Invoices:

Go to the relevant Event > CONTRACT > INVOICES
An ‘Invoices’ window will appear.

Click on next to the Invoice in question.
A fully rendered PDF preview window will open.

Click PDF in the top right corner to download the PDF.

An Invoice Keeps Its Amounts

An invoice keeps the amounts it was created with — fee, arrangement, additional costs, fees and additional income, including tax rate and deductions. If you change the contract or the settlement afterwards, for example the fee or the ticket numbers, the invoice no longer changes by itself. A later invoice for the same Event deducts it with exactly this amount.

If something has changed since then, the invoice list under FINANCES > INVOICES shows Changed: with the difference next to the invoice — the same applies in the agency. Hover over it to see what the invoice would come to today. If a later invoice already covers part of the change, it only says Changed without an amount.

When you open the invoice, a box at the top says ‘The contract or settlement has changed since this invoice was created.’ For each changed item it shows what is On the invoice and what applies Today per contract, plus the Invoice amount and the Difference.

As long as the invoice has not gone out yet, you take over the new amounts with Apply new amounts. Amounts set by hand stay as they are.

An invoice has gone out as soon as you have downloaded its PDF or XRechnung or sent it, or once it has been exported to DATEV, reminded, (partly) paid or finalized, or its status says so. Invoices created up to 23 October 2026 always count as gone out. The invoice then stays as it is, and you bill the difference with Create supplementary invoice (see Supplementary Invoice).

Supplementary Invoice after an Invoice Has Been Issued

If something changes after an invoice has already gone out — for instance because you add tickets —, the existing invoice stays unchanged. You bill the difference with a supplementary invoice: it deducts the old invoice and only bills the difference.

Enter the change, for example the missing tickets under CONTRACT > CLOSE SALE. If an invoice is based on these figures, a notice there tells you that the invoice amounts stay as they are and that the difference will then be shown on the invoice. The ticket fields stay editable — even if the invoice is finalized.

Open the invoice under CONTRACT > INVOICES. The box at the top shows the difference (see An invoice keeps its amounts). Click Create supplementary invoice and confirm: the invoice is finalized, and the new invoice opens — with the recipient, language and items of the old one.

The new invoice is titled ‘Supplementary invoice’ unless you enter your own invoice title. The old invoice appears on it as one line ‘Already invoiced’ and is deducted.

If a supplementary invoice is not possible for an invoice — for example with items from linked events —, the box says ‘A supplementary invoice is not possible for this invoice. It can be corrected with a credit note.’

Sending an Invoice by Email

Invoices can be sent straight from J.SHOW as a PDF attachment — with subject and text from a template, to several recipients, and optionally through your own mail server.

Open the INVOICES overview, a settlement package, or on the Event CONTRACT > INVOICES.

Open the invoice you want for editing or in the preview and click 'Email'. The “send invoice” window opens.

Recipients are pre-filled (invoice contact, otherwise the partner). choose contact adds more, or you enter a name and address by hand.

Subject and Message come from the template and can be overwritten beforehand. send a copy of this mail to me is pre-selected.

Click send.

Important: Sending finalizes the invoice; it cannot be changed afterwards.

If more than one account is stored, the Send method also appears: J.SHOW email or one of your own. Pre-selected is the one belonging to the billing entity that owns the invoice.

→ Custom Mail Server per Billing Entity

An invoice already sent shows sent on with date and time in the invoice list below the invoice number, plus the count if it was sent more than once (e.g. 2×). The same appears at the top of the send window, and the button is then called send again.

Currency & Tax Settings

To set your default billing currency:

Go to SETTINGS > PLATFORM > Currency box

To change the currency for a specific Event:

Go to the Event > CONTRACT > SETTINGS > Currency box and enter the desired billing currency.

Then click on SAVE.
You will now see a new category called Exchange Rate, where you can set the exchange rate between your default and event-specific currency.
This ensures accurate calculations in the final billing document.

Note: The Exchange Rate field only appears if the selected billing currency is different from your platform's default currency.

Currency Conversion on Invoices:
For invoices in a foreign currency, the summary lines (net, VAT, gross) automatically display the converted amount in the default currency in parentheses. Optionally, under SETTINGS > FINANCES > Invoice > Foreign Currency, you can enable the conversion display for individual invoice line items as well.

EUR Amount on Payment Receipt:
For invoices in foreign currency, an additional field appears upon payment receipt for the actual EUR amount received. This accounts for bank fees and daily exchange rate differences. The field is visible once the invoice status is set to paid or closed — for both invoices and prepayment invoices.

To apply a Withholding Tax to the Artist Fee:

Go to the Event > CONTRACT > SETTINGS > Withholding Tax box.

Enter the percentage rate to be deducted from the fee.

As soon as a withholding tax is set for one or more shows in the settlement package, a dedicated Withholding Tax column is automatically shown in the artist settlement — with the amount retained per show and a summary line "Withholding tax amount" in the grand total. This makes it easy to see at a glance how much has been withheld.

On the invoice, the withholding tax does not reduce the fee: Total Net contains the full fee, VAT is calculated on it, and only after Total Gross and after deductions is the withholding tax taken off the amount payable. Percentage payment terms and the amount in the invoice email are based on this amount payable. This applies to invoices created from 24 October 2026; older ones keep their previous breakdown.

The withholding tax is also available as a {withholdingtax} placeholder in contract templates and Deal Memos. When a contract is printed or a Deal Memo is sent, the placeholder is automatically replaced by the configured withholding tax percentage (e.g. "30 %"). If no withholding tax is set for the respective deal, the placeholder stays empty.

Artist Settlement PRO

Below the settlement the final total is worked out once more, step by step, so it is clear how it comes about. It names the same amount as the invoice for the same event: tax is calculated on the total, not per line. Previously the two could differ by a few cents.

For a full breakdown of how to create Settlement Packages and how they impact the Artist Settlement, please refer to the Finance section.

How expenses are shown: If Show expenses in detail is active, the settlement lists every expense individually. For items that were entered as a gross amount, a small extra line (Amount gross) appears underneath the net amount. If you don't want that line, switch it off with Show gross amount in brackets — under SETTINGS > FINANCES > Artist settlement for all packages, or in the settings of an individual settlement package for that one package only. Net amounts, supplier, description and all totals stay unchanged. The option is active by default, so nothing changes for existing settlements.

Adjusting the Booking Fee Percentage

The Booking Fee can be set individually per settlement package or globally under settings. It can be calculated either as a flat percentage or as a graduated booking fee with multiple brackets.

To set a default Booking Fee across all Settlement Packages:

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > ‘Booking Fee’ box.

Enter your preferred percentage (e.g. 15%)

To change it per Settlement:

Open the PROFIT tab of your Settlement Package and click next to 'Booking Fee' item.

Adjust manually, then click SAVE.

Individual rate for single events: In the same window, expand Individual rate per event below the package rate. Every event in the package has its own field there. If it stays empty, the package rate applies. A rate you enter applies to that event only, even with a graduated booking fee. If any event has its own rate, the section is already expanded when you open the window.

The PROFIT tab then shows “Booking Fee (per event)” (“Commission” in third-party money packages), with each event, its rate and amount below. The artist settlement, third-party money settlement, payment advice and commission/expense invoice all use the same rates.

Calculation basis: The “of” drop-down next to the percentage, in the settings and in the package, offers the basis Net Deal Revenue + Prod. Subsidies. The booking fee is then calculated on the deal revenue plus production subsidies, without deducting expenses first (unlike Profit).

Ticket fees: A direct share of the fee for the artist only carries the Booking Fee with the basis Profit. More under Ticket Fee Distribution.

Expenses the artist paid directly: With the basis Profit, expenses the artist paid and bears themselves also reduce the profit — profit means revenue minus costs, no matter which account paid. Not included are the share the agency bears through Cost Coverage by Agency and expenses with the cost type Internal costs or Recharged to artist. The booking fee is then calculated on the smaller profit; nothing else about the payout changes. Without such expenses everything stays as before.

In the artist settlement these expenses appear in the “Profit” box as their own line “Expenses paid by the artist directly”. With the basis Profit, the third-party money settlement and the payment advice show the calculation from revenue to profit in the block “Profit calculation for the commission (net)”, with the commission below it for a flat rate. With a tiered commission, the block ends at the profit. In the package view, with this basis, the lines “Expenses paid by the artist directly” (if any) and “of Profit” appear below the booking fee or commission. They do not count towards the total.

Once all relevant costs and income have been confirmed, you can generate a final Artist Settlement PDF to document the actual payout due.

Graduated Booking Fee

With a graduated booking fee, the fee percentage is not applied as a single flat rate but calculated in multiple brackets per show. Each bracket applies from a specific amount upwards with its own percentage. This way, for example, smaller shows can be charged a lower and larger shows a higher commission.

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > "Booking Fee" and enable the checkbox Graduated Booking Fee.
A bracket editor appears with two columns: from (the amount from which the bracket applies) and Booking Fee (the percentage for that bracket).
Click to add a new bracket, or the next to a row to remove it. All changes are saved automatically.

Note: As soon as the graduated booking fee is active, the flat percentage is grayed out. In the settlement and the package, the booking fee is marked with "graduated".

Revenue Split Artist / Agency

As an alternative to the classic booking fee, the settlement can also be run as an Revenue Split between artist and agency. Revenue is shared proportionally — separately for Fee / Tickets and Additional income.

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > box "Artist Settlement" and enable the checkbox Revenue Split Artist/Agency.
Two input fields appear:

With the income split active, an additional section "Artist and Agency Share" appears in the artist settlement, breaking down the shares from ticket income and additional income per show and showing a total split including VAT.

Important interactions:
• When the income split is active, the classic booking fee is suppressed automatically — applying both at the same time would double-charge.
• In third-party money settlements, the income split is not available. The label in the package overview then reads "Commission" or "Graduated Commission" instead of "Booking Fee".

Exclude Revenue

Your Revenue section within each Settlement Package reflects expected earnings per Event.
To exclude specific income sources from an Artist Settlement:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > select your package.

Click EXCLUDE REVENUE in the top right.
An ‘Exclude Revenue’ window will appear.

Here, you can deselect individual entries for:

Click EXCLUDE ALL to remove all income from calculation, or EXCLUDE NONE to reset.
The profit calculations will adjust automatically.

Special Settlement Packages for Excluded Income

You still need an overview of excluded income — whether for internal reporting or for the artist's share of that income. This is where Special Settlement Packages come in: a third package type next to manual and automatic monthly packages. In a special package you pick any excluded income items and receive a purely internal settlement with a dedicated artist share.

Desktop: Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES. Next to the toggles for Manual Packages and Automatic Monthly Packages, there is now a third toggle Special Packages.

Click + New Special Package, enter a Title for the special package and confirm with SAVE.

Once a package is selected, the following actions are available:

Note: The special settlement is a purely internal listing — it does not create an invoice, it is not finalized, and it does not appear in the regular settlement overviews of the artist settlement.

Platform note: Special packages are currently only available on the Artist platform on Desktop.

Cost Coverage by Agency

If your agency covers specific costs (e.g. hotel or pre-production), you can factor this into the Profit tab.

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > open your Settlement Package.

Click on EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE.

In the 'Edit Settlement Package' window, check all that apply under "Cost Covered by Agency".
For each enabled category, you can set a percentage (1–100%) to specify the share covered by the agency. For example, the agency may cover 50% of hotel costs. The default is 100%.
Click SAVE to finish.

To apply default agency coverage to all future packages:

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > ‘Cost Covered by Agency’ box.
Check for all recurring costs your agency typically absorbs (e.g. hotels, flights) and set the desired percentage for each.

To load these defaults into a specific Settlement Package:

Open EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE inside a Settlement Package.

Click APPLY FROM SETTING to sync it with your global preferences,
and then SAVE to finish.

Partial Payments

Partial Payments allow you to transfer funds to the Artist before the final Settlement Package is complete. This can be useful when a tour spans multiple dates and the Artist would like to receive a portion of their earnings earlier.

Note: A Partial Payment is not the same as an Advance Payment. Advance Payments are made by the promoter to you for a single show; they are listed in the show under CONTRACT in the ‘Advance Payments’ box (see Generating Invoices). A Partial Payment, on the other hand, is paid by you to the Artist out of their share of the Settlement Package.

To access the full Artist Profit — after all deductions and costs have been accounted for:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > PROFIT.

To create a Partial Payment:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > PROFIT > find the ‘Partial Payment’ box.

Click on to generate a new Partial Payment.
An ‘Edit Partial Payment’ window will appear.

Fill in the Date, Name, and Amount.

Click SAVE to finish.
The Partial Payment will now appear in the table and will automatically be deducted from the total Artist Profit.

Show event revenue

The artist settlement ends with a summary table "Total Event Revenue" listing all revenue per show — fee, ticket fees, special revenues and commission shares. You can hide this table whenever the settlement should only display the values that are directly relevant to the artist.

As the default for all packages:

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > box "Artist settlement" and tick the checkbox Show event revenue as desired. Default: on.

To turn the table on or off for a single package only:

Open EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE on the relevant package and tick the checkbox Show event revenue there.

Note: The "Show event revenue" checkbox works independently from "Show partner revenue" — both tables can be toggled separately.

Show partner revenue

In the artist settlement, an additional table "Partner Revenue" can optionally be shown at the bottom. It lists, per show, all fees and special revenues going to the partner/promoter — purely informational; the artist payout is not affected by it.

As the default for all packages:

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > box "Artist settlement" and enable Show partner revenue.

To turn the table on or off for a single package only:

Open EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE on the relevant package and tick the checkbox Show partner revenue there.

The checkboxes under SETTINGS > FINANCES are the default. If a package has its own setting, that setting applies — the configuration does not change it.

Notes:
• The table only appears in the standard settlement format.
• For third-party money packages, the option is disabled — there, partner revenue is not tracked separately.

Customize labels in the artist settlement

The column headings in the artist settlement (Income, Expenses, Net income, Net income production) can be customized per language — handy if you want to use industry-standard or client-specific terms.

Go to SETTINGS > FINANCES > box "Labels in the artist settlement".

For each of the supported languages you'll find four input fields. By default they come pre-filled with the standard term in that language — simply type your preferred wording. Empty fields automatically fall back to the default label.

The customized labels appear in the online preview and in the print PDF of the artist settlement — in each case the version for the language the settlement is printed in (see Language of the document).

Printing Artist Settlement

To print the Artist Settlement:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > select the relevant Settlement Package.

Click on SETTLEMENT.
A 'Settlement preview' window will open.

Click on PDF in the top right corner.
The PDF will automatically be downloaded.

Note: The PDF is only available once the sale is closed for all events in the package (see Closing a Sale). As long as an event is still open, the preview shows a notice and, below it, the date and place of every open event. The same applies to the third-party money settlements, the commission/expense invoice and the Payment Advice.

Language of the document: At the top right of the preview window, next to PDF, you choose the language the document appears in. The platform language is preselected (see Global Settings). If you change it, the preview reloads, and the PDF comes in the same language. The choice is not saved — the next time you open the window, the platform language is back.

This applies to all documents of a settlement package: SETTLEMENT, THIRD-PARTY MONEY SETTLEMENT, THIRD-PARTY MONEY NET STATEMENT, THIRD-PARTY MONEY GROSS STATEMENT, PAYMENT ADVICE and SHOW SPECIAL STATEMENT. A third-party money invoice keeps the language that was recorded when it was created.

DATEV Export PRO

J.SHOW can export your financial data in DATEV-compatible format for seamless transfer to your accounting software.

To export financial data to DATEV:

Go to FINANCES > DATEV.

Select the date range for your export using the Quick selection (LAST MONTH, LAST QUARTER, LAST YEAR, THIS YEAR) or set your own range with From and To. A range that extends across the start of your fiscal year is rejected: DATEV only accepts bookings from a single fiscal year per posting batch. In that case, export the period before and the period after separately.

The overview shows the total number of invoices, how many are finalized, already exported, and pending.

Click DOWNLOAD CSV EXPORT to download a DATEV-compatible CSV file in EXTF format.

The file is named EXTF_Buchungsstapel_…csv and follows the current DATEV format (ANSI character set), so your tax advisor can import it directly. If an invoice has a payment term, its due date is written to Belegfeld 2 (DDMMYY).

If an invoice deducts an earlier invoice for the same event, for example a supplementary invoice, the export books the invoice in full plus one counter-entry per deducted invoice, with “abzgl.” and the number of the earlier invoice in the posting text. This keeps the earlier invoice’s revenue from appearing twice in your books. Deducted advance payments get no counter-entry.

Note: By default, only finalized (festgeschrieben) invoices go into the file. If you check Also export non-finalized, the others are included too; if Auto-finalize on export is on in the DATEV settings, J.SHOW finalizes them during the export. Invoices that have already been exported are left out so nothing is posted twice — check Re-export already exported to include them again.

Note: DATEV must be configured under DATEV Settings before use. Configuration includes chart of accounts (SKR03/SKR04), consultant number, client number, and account mapping.

Commission/Expense Invoice PRO

The Commission/Expense Invoice allows agencies to create formal invoices to their artists — for booking fees (commissions) and recharged expenses.

The invoice is automatically generated from the data of a Settlement Package and includes:

Prerequisite: The Commission/Expense Invoice is only available for third-party money packages. Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES, select the package and click EDIT SETTLEMENT PACKAGE (for automatic monthly packages: SETTINGS). In the 'Settlement format for this package' field, choose one of the three third-party money options:

If the field is set to Standard, there is no Commission/Expense Invoice. The option only determines what the artist settlement looks like — the invoice itself is the same for all three.

The three Third-Party Money formats can only be selected if the platform belongs to an agency: the agency issues the invoice to the artist.

To create a Commission/Expense Invoice:

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES > select the relevant package.

Click GENERATE INVOICE. J.SHOW creates the invoice with the next invoice number and opens the Edit Commission/Expense Invoice window.
Next to it is PREVIEW — for manual packages as well as for automatic monthly packages. It shows you the invoice beforehand without creating it or using up an invoice number.
If the package already has an invoice, INVOICE: <number> is shown in its place — click it to open the invoice again for editing.

In edit mode, you can adjust: Invoice number, Date, Payment due date, Payment method (incl. custom option), Tax (Show tax / Do not show tax, plus the Print reverse charge statement tick box), Billing entity and recipient with full address details, as well as intro and closing text.

At the bottom of the window you will find PREVIEW, PDF and EMAIL — all three save your changes first. Click PDF to download the invoice as PDF.
An XRechnung (XML) can also be generated (only for platforms based in Germany).

Invoices can be finalized — after which no changes are possible. Corrections are made via a credit note.

Payment Advice

In a third-party money package, the agency collects the income in trust on the artist’s behalf. The Payment advice tells the artist which amount will be paid out after commission, expenses, withholding tax and partial payments have been deducted.

Go to FINANCES > SETTLEMENT PACKAGES and select a package whose settlement format is set to one of the third-party money options.

Click Payment advice. The preview shows sender and recipient, date, package and period, the events and the breakdown down to the payout amount.

Click PDF in the top right corner to download the letter.

Note: Like the settlement, the payment advice is only available as a PDF once the sale is closed for all events in the package (see Closing a Sale). Until then, the preview shows a notice with the date and place of every event that is still open. Events without a show, such as off days or travel days, do not count.

If the package already has a commission/expense invoice, the advice names its number: commission and expenses are shown there and have already been deducted here.

The payment advice is not an invoice: it gets no number, is not finalized, not stored and not passed to DATEV. It is available for manual packages and for automatic monthly packages.

Standalone Invoices PRO

With Standalone Invoices you can create invoices that are not tied to a specific Event — e.g. for general services, consulting fees or other charges.

Note: Event-related invoices (advance invoices, final invoices, commission/expense invoices) are still created via the contract view of an Event. Use Standalone Invoices only for invoices without an Event reference.

Creating a Standalone Invoice

To create a Standalone Invoice:

Go to FINANCES > INVOICES and click + Create Invoice.

Select the Billing entity from the dropdown (if multiple are configured) and optionally choose a Recipient from the partner list.

Click Create — the invoice will be created and the editor will open.

Editing the Invoice

In edit mode, you can adjust the following fields:

Splitting a payment term across line items

For every payment term you can choose how its amount is composed: as a fixed amount, as a percentage of the total, or as a per-line-item split. The last option is especially useful when the invoice has line items with different tax rates (e.g. fee at 7% + hotel buy-out at 19%) and a single payment term should only cover part of them.

To split a payment term across line items:

In edit mode, click next to the payment term and choose amount type "Per line item".

For every line item a row with a percent input and a live gross preview appears. Enter the share of that line item that's due for this payment term — totals including the correct VAT are calculated per line item automatically.

Per line item, the sum of all payment terms must equal 100 % (remaining amount is shown below the input). Click SAVE to apply the split.

Per-line-item splits work for regular invoices, advance invoices and standalone invoices. The PDF lists, per payment term, which line items are included with their net, VAT and gross amounts.

Preview and PDF

Click Preview to load a preview of the invoice.

Click PDF to download the invoice as PDF. An XRechnung (XML) can also be generated (only for platforms based in Germany).

Finalization and Cancellation

Invoices can be finalized — after which no changes are possible. Corrections are made via a credit note, which automatically applies the original amounts with a negative sign.

This also applies to an invoice or advance invoice that has been transferred to DATEV or sits in a batch DATEV is currently processing, even if it is not finalized: it can no longer be changed or deleted, and the top of the window shows 'This invoice has been transferred to DATEV'. Here too, corrections are made via a credit note. Canceling, finalizing, recording a payment, sending a reminder and sending the invoice remain possible.

When a credit note is created, the original invoice is automatically set to status Canceled and finalized in the same step. The Create Credit Note button then disappears, so the same invoice cannot be canceled twice. The status applies to all invoice types — regular, advance, commission/expense and standalone — and has its own color and filter in the invoice list.

Before the credit note is created, J.SHOW asks for confirmation. If the invoice has not been sent yet, you can simply delete it instead. Once the credit note exists, the original and the credit note belong together: neither of them can be deleted anymore.

The J.SHOW App

The J.SHOW App gives you mobile access to all your Artist Platforms — view upcoming Events, check Travel details, access files, and stay connected with your team on the go.

Download & Installation

The app is available for free in the Apple App Store and the Google Play Store.

On the Mac, J.SHOW is available as an app of its own in the App Store — it is the same listing as for iPhone and iPad (Mac from macOS 13, iPhone and iPad from iOS or iPadOS 16). What it does differently from the browser is described under The Mac App.

To login via the app, you must be registered on at least one Artist Platform.

Once you login, you will automatically have access to all platforms that are linked to this email address.

All agency employees need to register on their respective Artist Platforms to be able to access the app.

Tip: The J.SHOW App can also be installed as a Progressive Web App (PWA) directly from your browser — use your browser's "Add to Home Screen" option for an app-like experience without the App Store. Push notifications, however, do not work this way: they need the installed J.SHOW app from the App Store or Google Play — via a shortcut on your home screen these notifications come by email.

If you open J.SHOW on your phone in a browser, a full-screen message J.SHOW works best in the app points you to the app. Get the app takes you straight to the App Store or Google Play; Continue in the browser this time lets you carry on in the browser. After either button the message stays away for 7 days — on all J.SHOW platforms. It never appears inside the app itself, on a computer or on a tablet.

Nothing is sold in the J.SHOW apps for iPhone, iPad and Mac: taking out a subscription, trying or upgrading to PRO, reactivating a platform, withdrawing a cancellation and topping up AI credits are hidden there. In their place it says Purchases aren't available in this app. Canceling and deleting remain possible.

Multi-Account

The app supports up to 3 email addresses simultaneously, giving you access to all Artist Platforms linked to each account.

To add an additional account:

Tap the (J) icon or the arrow at the top of the app to open the platform menu.

Tap ADD ANOTHER ACCOUNT and log in with your additional email address.

To switch between accounts:

Tap the (J) icon at the top to see all platforms across all logged-in accounts.

Tap on any Artist Platform logo to switch directly to that platform.

Note: Each account switch uses a secure one-time token for authentication — you stay logged in across all accounts without needing to re-enter passwords.

If a remembered account is no longer logged in – usually because its password was changed – it no longer disappears from the list without a word: the app tells you once that this address is no longer logged in on the device. Tap + Add account to log in again, or Close to dismiss the notice.

Navigation

The app uses a streamlined navigation structure:

Home Screen — "My events"

The home screen displays all upcoming Events where you are listed in the travel party, across all registered platforms. Events are shown in chronological order.

Tap on an Event to view its details.

Tap on the Artist's logo to go to the full Event list of that Artist Platform.

If you are registered on multiple platforms, use the filter button to filter the Event list by specific Artist Platforms. Your selection is remembered.

Main Menu

Tap the menu icon to expand the main navigation.

The menu provides access to your platforms, settings, calendar subscription, and account management.

At the very bottom of the menu is the card What's new with the latest changes to J.SHOW. Tap it to expand — older entries load as you scroll. The same checkbox sits at the top of the expanded card.

Bottom Dock

The bottom dock shows quick-access tabs for your upcoming Events, providing at-a-glance information about your next shows.

The app menu has the checkbox Show startup animation. Remove it and the app starts without the animation. The entry appears in the current Android app and in the iPhone and iPad app from version 2.0 — in the browser and in the old app it stays hidden. The Mac app does not have it: there the animation is skipped when “Reduce motion” is turned on in your Mac's accessibility settings.

On iPhone and iPad the app menu has the line Open addresses in. Choose Google Maps or Apple Maps — your choice is saved right away and applies to every address (venue, accommodation, promoter …) on all platforms of your logged-in accounts whenever you tap it on your phone or tablet. On a computer, addresses always open in Google Maps. On Android devices the line does not appear.

In the app menu, Appearance lets you choose between Same as my device, Light and Dark. The choice applies on this device to the app and to every artist platform you open there: switch under LIGHT/DARK on a platform and the app follows, and vice versa. Another device – a second phone, your tablet, the Mac app or a browser – keeps its own setting. With Same as my device, J.SHOW follows the device's light/dark setting, even if it changes while the app is open.

Event Details

Tapping on an Event opens the detail view with all relevant information for that show:

Tip: Swipe left or right to navigate between Events, just like using the arrow keys in the desktop version.

Conversations

Stay connected with your team through the app's conversation feature:

Access Event-specific conversations directly from the Event detail view.

Add comments and notes visible to the relevant team members.

Note: Conversation notifications are delivered via push notification so you never miss important updates while on the road.

Files

Access and download files that have been uploaded to Events or your profile:

View files attached to individual Events from the Event detail view.

Download files for viewing — files are securely accessed using time-limited authentication tokens.

Note: File downloads usually require an active internet connection. The exception is the current app for Android, iPhone and iPad: for your next three Events per platform where you are in the Travel Party, it saves the Event files for offline mode as well — the files under Files for you and Files open there even without a connection. Files under Files that are larger than 20 MB remain available online only.

Attachments open in the app in a preview instead of landing in the download folder: PDF, images, audio, video and text files are shown directly. Anything that cannot be displayed (Word, Excel or ZIP, for instance) asks first and can be opened with another app.

In the app for iPhone and iPad, two icons sit at the top right of the preview: the chain icon creates a time-limited link that lets someone without access open the file (see Share a File via Link) — it appears for files from an event's file list, not for files the app shows from its offline storage. The arrow pointing down passes on the file itself: the device's share sheet then offers saving, AirDrop, mail and more.

Notifications

The app supports push notifications to keep you informed in real time:

To configure notifications:

App platform: tap the menu — Notifications is a card of its own there, between the accounts and 'Subscribe to the calendar'. It applies to all your accounts at once.

Desktop and mobile: open your profile and click 'Notifications via email or App-Push'.

Choose individually which types of notifications you want to receive via push and/or email.

Offline Mode

The app automatically downloads all upcoming Events from every Artist Platform for convenient offline use.

What's available offline:

What requires an internet connection:

If the app detects no internet connection after 15 seconds, it automatically switches to offline mode. The app will then display the downloaded platforms.

Note: Offline data refreshes automatically every 4 minutes when connectivity is restored, or when you return to the app.

When there is no connection, the view shows the state it last loaded instead of an empty page. How old it is stands next to it — As of with the time. On a festival site with poor reception you at least have the figures from earlier rather than none at all.

If the connection comes back while you are in offline mode, your next tap takes you straight to the current online page — whether you tap the Event list, an Event or one of its tabs. If the connection is still too weak, the saved version opens as before, and your next taps go there without waiting until the connection holds again.

Calendar Subscription

Subscribe to your Events directly from the app to sync them with your phone's calendar:

Tap the (J) icon at the top to open the platform menu.

Access the Calendar Subscription option from the menu.

Events will appear in your default calendar app (Apple Calendar, Google Calendar, etc.) and stay automatically synchronized.

For more details on calendar subscription options, see Calendar Subscription.

Wrapped — Year in Review

At the end of each year, J.SHOW generates a personalized Wrapped summary — your Year in Review, showcasing your touring highlights.

Your Wrapped includes:

To view your Wrapped:

When available, the Wrapped feature is accessible from the app's home screen.

To customize the look:

Choose between three visual themes: Stage Lights (gold/orange), On The Road (blue/white), or Concert Poster (cream/black).

Download your Wrapped as a PNG image to share on social media or with your team.

The Mac App

The Mac app shows your platform just as you know it from a browser on your computer — with every area, including contracts, invoices and settlements — but as an app of its own, with its own window and an icon in the Dock. You log in once; every further window uses the same login. What it adds:

API & Integrations

Every J.SHOW platform comes with its own interface (API). Other systems use it to access your data directly — your website showing your tour dates, a ticketing system, a newsletter tool or your own script that pulls events in from somewhere else.

The API is part of every platform, at no extra cost. All you need is an API key from the settings. This chapter describes the interface in general terms — the concrete values of your own platform (your own event types, your own fields, your own templates) are listed in your platform's live docs.

How the API is structured

The API mirrors the structure of the platforms: every platform has its own API on its own subdomain, reachable at https://{subdomain}/api/. That gives you two levels:

Rule of thumb: Reading across many artists → agency API. Everything detailed → artist API. Writing works through both — through the agency API, though, only into the artist platforms released for it in the key.

A typical flow for an agency:

Call /api/artists on the agency subdomain — the response lists all artist platforms of that agency, each with its subdomain as id.

Fetch the events with /api/shows — without parameters across all artists, with &artist= narrowed to one platform.

For details or for writing, point the same call at https://{artist}/api/ — using an API key of that artist platform.

Note: Write access applies per artist platform, never across the agency as a whole: the key lists individually which platforms may be written to. Note the difference from reading: there an empty selection means all of them, including future ones. For writing, all ticked deliberately does not mean the same — a newly connected artist platform is never writable automatically, it has to be added explicitly.

API keys & permissions

Access always runs through an API key. Where to create, rename, copy and delete keys is covered under API Access.

You can create several keys per platform — ideally one per connected system. Deleting a key cuts off that one integration only; all the others keep running.

What a key is allowed to do is set per key (pencil icon next to the key):

SettingEffect
include unpublished eventsWithout this option the key only returns published and announced events. With it, it also sees events that have not been published yet.
Read content (schedules & custom fields)Unlocks the content fields and the detail endpoints — schedules, custom fields, event details, crew, setlist, guest list, vehicles, presales and expenses.
Write access (create & fill events)Unlocks the write endpoint. Available on the artist platform only.
Artist platforms for this API keyAgency platform only: limits the key to selected artist platforms. Without a restriction the key sees all of them.

Our recommendation: one key per integration, with as few permissions as possible. A website that only displays tour dates needs neither content access nor write access.

Security: The key travels as a parameter in the address. Treat it like a password — never use it in publicly visible code (JavaScript in the browser); fetch the data server-side and cache the result.

Per artist platform you can additionally set a Time range: Additionally per artist platform: from when and until when this key sees the artist at all. Leave empty for no limit; both days are included. That lets you prepare a release without making it visible right away, and let an access end on a set date instead of having to remember it.

Base URL, authentication & response format

GET https://{subdomain}/api/shows?token=YOUR_API_KEY

The response always has the same shape:

{
  "data": [ … ]
}

Throughout this chapter, {subdomain} stands for the address of your platform, {artist} for the subdomain of an artist platform and {agency} for that of an agency platform.

Agency API

The agency API bundles all artist platforms of the agency under one address. It is the right way in whenever a system needs the big picture — an agency website listing the dates of every artist, say, or an internal report. It returns core data, no detail or advancing data. Writing is possible, but only into the artist platforms explicitly released for it in the key concerned.

Agency endpoints

EndpointReturns
/api/artistsAll artist platforms of the agency — id (the subdomain) and name. This is the entry point: the values for the artist parameter of every other call come from this list.
/api/showsThe upcoming events — across all artists without a filter, or just one platform with artist.
/api/toursThe tour blocks the events belong to.
/api/venuesThe venue directory.
/api/partnersThe directory of partners and promoters.

Parameters:

ParameterMeaning
tokenRequired. The API key of the agency platform.
artistOptional. Subdomain of an artist platform — narrows the response to that platform.
showOptional. A single event in the format {artist}_{S_ID}.
venue / partnerOptional. A single entry from the respective directory.
GET https://{agency}/api/artists?token=YOUR_API_KEY
GET https://{agency}/api/shows?token=YOUR_API_KEY
GET https://{agency}/api/shows?token=YOUR_API_KEY&artist={artist}
GET https://{agency}/api/shows?token=YOUR_API_KEY&show={artist}_1234
{
  "data": [
    { "id": "{artist}", "name": "Artist Name" }
  ]
}

Things to know

Artist API

The artist platform carries the full interface: every read endpoint — from the plain event list to the complete advancing state of a single event — plus the write endpoint that external systems use to create and fill in events.

Read endpoints

All read endpoints are called with GET and answer with JSON. The “Requires” column names the key permission the endpoint needs.

EndpointReturnsRequires
/api/showsAll upcoming events with core data, status, venue, partner and ticket links. Without a date range the list starts today. With from/to (YYYY-MM-DD) you request a period, past dates included — to alone returns everything up to that day. With crew (email address preferred) only the events the person is booked into as part of the travel party.—
/api/show_detailA single event in full — the complete advancing state.Content access
/api/toursThe tour blocks of the platform.—
/api/venuesThe venue directory, with name search.Full data & search: content access
/api/hotelsThe accommodation directory, with name search.Full data & search: content access
/api/partnersThe directory of partners and promoters, with name search.Full data & search: content access
/api/crewThe people on the platform with their crewId and their function — the source for every call that assigns people.Content access
/api/vehiclesThe vehicles in the fleet.Content access
/api/setlistThe setlist of an event, a setlist template, or the entire song library.Content access
/api/guestsThe guest list of an event with entries, allocations and areas.Content access
/api/presalesThe presale figures per ticket system, optionally with a weekly history.Content access · PRO
/api/expensesThe recorded expenses of an event, including attached receipts.Content access · PRO
/api/flight_lookupThe scheduled route for a flight number, with times and terminal.Content access
/api/templatesThe templates of the platform (event overview, travel party, contract) with their IDs.—
/api/show_typesThe event types valid on this platform — including the ones you created yourself.—
/api/capabilitiesWhich features and resources this platform knows — handy for integrations serving several platforms.—
/api/artistsOn the artist platform: the platform itself, with its subdomain as id.—

Endpoints that require “content access” return an error without that permission. /api/shows, /api/venues, /api/hotels and /api/partners never fail — their response simply contains fewer fields.

Event fields

These are the fields /api/shows returns per event. They are the foundation of every event integration:

FieldMeaning
idThe unique ID of the event in the format {artist}_{S_ID}.
artistThe subdomain of the artist platform the event belongs to.
typeThe event type as a short word, such as concert, tour or festival.
type-nameThe spelled-out label of the event type, if maintained.
titleThe title of the event.
showDateThe date in the format YYYY-MM-DD. With several event options, the first day.
periodtrue if the event spans a period of several option days.
showDatePeriodEndThe last day of that period, otherwise null.
showDoorsDoors as a timestamp with time zone, otherwise null.
showStartStart as a timestamp with time zone, otherwise null.
statusThe booking status of the event (see the table below).
publishStatusThe publication status for the outside world (see the table below).
releaseStartThe point in time from which the event should be shown publicly.
releaseEndThe point in time from which the event should no longer be shown, if set.
presaleStartThe point in time from which the presale runs. Purely informational — what follows from it is up to your system.
tourThe ID of the tour block, if the event belongs to one.
venueThe ID of the linked venue.
partnerThe ID of the linked partner or promoter.
venueNameOverrideA different venue name for this event only — null means the name from the directory applies.
venueCityOverrideA different city for this event only.
venueCountryOverrideA different country as a country code.
partnerNameOverrideA different partner name for this event only.
partnerWebsiteOverrideA different partner website for this event only.
postponedtrue if the event is flagged as postponed. Set deliberately by hand.
relocatedtrue if the event is flagged as relocated.
ticketlinksThe ticket links as a list, each with a label, an address and whether that channel is sold out. An entry without a valid web address does not appear here.
supportsThe support acts as a list.
schedulesThe schedules of the event. Only with the “content access” permission.
customFieldsThe custom fields of the event. Only with the “content access” permission.
showTypeThe ID of the event type — the very same ID the write endpoint expects. Only with “content access”.
venueTypeThe ID of the venue type. Only with “content access”.
tbaDeprecated. tba and tbaDate remain for compatibility — use publishStatus and releaseStart instead.

Possible values for status:

ValueMeaning
confirmedConfirmed.
tbcTo be confirmed.
optionOption — the day is penciled in, but not binding.
ideaIdea — just a thought at this stage.
cancelledCanceled.

Possible values for publishStatus:

ValueMeaning
publishedPublic — may be displayed.
tbaAnnounced — there is a release time, see releaseStart.
unpublishedNot published — only returned to keys that are enabled for it.

Note: Without a date range the API returns all upcoming events; with from/to past ones as well. What of that ends up on a website is decided by your own system, based on status, publishStatus, releaseStart and releaseEnd.

If you would rather not write any code at all: there is a ready-made way to put your events on a website without the API — see Embedding Your Event List on Your Website.

One event in detail

/api/show_detail returns a single event in full — everything that comes together during advancing:

GET https://{subdomain}/api/show_detail?token=YOUR_API_KEY&show={artist}_1234

Tip: Always read before you write. That way you know what has already been filled in and never overwrite existing details.

Write access

External systems use the write endpoint to create events, fill them in and change them. On the artist platform it works exclusively with a key that has write access switched on. An agency can also reach it through its own address — https://{agency}/api/write with the parameter artist (the subdomain of the artist platform) — but only for the artist platforms ticked in the Write column of the agency key (see Agency API). Methods and resources are the same.

Everything runs through a single address — /api/write. What happens is controlled by the HTTP method and by the resource parameter. Without resource it is about the event itself:

MethodMeaning
POSTCreates a new event. The date is required.
PATCHChanges an existing event. Only what appears in the call gets written.
DELETEDeletes an event permanently, along with its attached data. The crew is notified just as it would be from the interface.

The fields of the event:

FieldMeaning
dateDate in the format YYYY-MM-DD. Required when creating; when changing, it moves the event.
idThe ID of the event. Required when changing and deleting.
statusThe booking status. When creating without a value: “to be confirmed”.
titleThe title of the event.
showTypeThe ID of the event type. An ID unknown on this platform is rejected.
venueTypeThe ID of the venue type.
applyTemplateApplies the template linked to the event type — exactly as in the interface.
schedules[]The schedules of the event, each with content, title and visibility.
customFields[]The custom fields of the event, each with content, title and visibility.
POST https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY
Content-Type: application/json

{
  "date": "2026-09-01",
  "status": "option",
  "title": "Release Show",
  "showType": 0,
  "schedules": [
    { "index": 1, "title": "Run of show", "content": "18:00 Soundcheck\n20:00 Doors", "visible": true }
  ]
}
PATCH https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY
Content-Type: application/json

{ "id": "{artist}_1234", "status": "confirmed" }
DELETE https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY
Content-Type: application/json

{ "id": "{artist}_1234" }

The response contains the ID of the event:

{ "id": "{artist}_1234" }

Important: Writing calls behave exactly like an entry made in the interface: notifications go out, the change log is written, deadlines and templates take effect.

Changes made without naming a person appear in the Change Log with API · [name of the API key] as the editor – so you can tell which key wrote them.

If you pass a new date when changing an event, the event is moved: every to-do deadline shifts by the same number of days, the old day is kept as a “moved from” marker and the crew is notified. So only pass the date when you really want to move the event.

Advancing resources

With the resource parameter, the same endpoint addresses the individual areas of an event — from the venue directory through accommodations and travel to the guest list. That lets you build an event completely from the outside:

AreaResourcesMeaning
Venuevenue, venue_link, venue_contact, venue_alt, venue_stageCreate and maintain venues in the directory, link them to the event, add contact persons, set alternatives and map the stages or halls of a venue.
Accommodationhotel, hotel_link, hotel_room, hotel_roomingCreate accommodations, put one into an accommodation slot of the event — slots 1–4, or as an additional accommodation from slot 5 onwards (up to 20, always the next free slot) —, add rooms and assign people to beds. "hotel": null on a slot from 5 onwards takes that accommodation off the event together with its rooms.
Partnerpartner, partner_link, partner_contactCreate partners and promoters, put one into any of the three partner slots and maintain their contact persons.
Contact personsshow_contact, cp_otherSet the event's local contact and tour contacts, and add any number of further contacts.
CateringcateringSet catering type, buyout and description for the event.
Travel partyshow_crewBook crew onto the event and remove them again — with the same notifications as in the interface. A PATCH with crewIds and passive (0–3) sets the passive level of people already booked, per event; anyone not in the travel party is not booked.
Traveltravel, travel_entryArrival and departure as a simple entry (distance and travel time, calculated automatically on request) or as individual travel entries per person and means of transport. With visibleTo you set which permission levels can see a travel entry (management, artist, crewplus, crew, guest; null = everyone, [] = only the people listed plus Admin, Agency and tour management).
Vehiclesvehicle, vehicle_link, vehicle_driver, vehicle_passenger, vehicle_travel,
vehicle_vorlage, vehicle_vorlage_link, apply_vehicle_template
Maintain the fleet, assign vehicles to the event, set drivers and passengers, attach vehicles to travel entries, and create and apply vehicle templates.
To-dostodo, todo_reminderCreate tasks with a deadline, tick them off and set reminders for individual people.
Date optionstermin_optionPropose alternative days and remove them again, as long as no day is fixed yet.
Guest listguestlist, guestlist_limit, price_group, guest_area, guest_entrySet the settings and allocations, create price groups and areas, and add, edit and remove individual guests.
Setlistsong, setlist, setlist_templateMaintain the song library, arrange songs on the event, and create and transfer setlist templates.
Filesfile, person_file, show_person_fileStore files on the event, on a person, or on a person within the travel party — and remove them again.
Templatesapply_templateApply a saved template to the event — event overview, travel party or contract.
Deal & contract PROdeal, deal_participation, additional_cost, contract_status, contract_partnerSet deal type, guarantee, participation tiers and additional costs, plus contract status, deadlines and contracting party.
Expenses PROexpense, expense_fileRecord the actual expenses of the cost tracking and attach receipts as files.
Presales PROpresales, ticketsystemReport presale figures per ticket system and remove ticket systems.
POST  https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY&resource=hotel
      { "name": "Hotel …", "city": "Berlin", "checkIn": "15:00" }

POST  https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY&resource=hotel_link
      { "show": "{artist}_1234", "slot": 1, "hotel": "hotel_{artist}_5" }

Note: Exactly which fields an individual resource expects is documented in your platform's live docs — every resource is listed there with its method, required fields and an example.

Event types & venue types

Event type and venue type are passed as numbers. These standard event types exist on every platform — which of them can actually be picked depends on the platform settings:

IDLabelCounts as a show
0Concertyes
1Touryes
2Festivalyes
3Rehearsalno
4Promoyes
5Off Dayno
6Travelno
7Showyes
8Preparingno
9Supportyes
10Previewyes
11Featureyes
12Set Upno
13Tear Downno
14Wrap-upno

On top of that, every platform can create its own event types (see Linking Templates to Event Types). Their IDs differ from platform to platform and therefore do not appear in this manual. The valid list for your platform — standard and custom, each with ID and label — is in your platform's live docs and can be queried at any time:

GET https://{subdomain}/api/show_types?token=YOUR_API_KEY

The venue types, by contrast, are the same on every platform:

IDLabel
0not specified
1Club
2Hall
3Arena
4Open Air
5Tent
6Stadium

Visibility & permission levels

Schedules, custom fields, catering and additional contacts can be visible to some permission levels and hidden from others. Reading and writing use the same notation:

ValueMeaning
"roles": ["all"]Visible to everyone. Same as leaving it unset.
"roles": []Visible to admin and agency only.
"roles": ["tourmanager","crew"]Additionally visible to the permission levels listed.
"visible": true|falseShort form: true means “everyone”, false means “admin and agency only”. An explicit list of permission levels takes precedence.

These permission levels can be named:

tourmanager, artist, crew-plus, crew, guest

Admin and agency always see everything and are therefore never listed.

IDs & references

Records are addressed through readable IDs. The pattern is always the same, so an ID stays unambiguous even when several platforms work together:

RecordFormatMeaning
Event{artist}_{S_ID}Subdomain of the artist platform plus the internal number of the event.
Tourtour_{artist}_{id}Tour block.
Venuevenue_{prefix}_{id}Venue from the directory.
Partnerpartner_{prefix}_{id}Partner or promoter from the directory.
Accommodationhotel_{prefix}_{id}Accommodation from the directory.
CrewcrewIdA person on the platform — a plain number, available from the people list.
Guestg_…Entry on the guest list.
Price Categorypg_…Price group of an event.
Areaglb_…Guest list area.
Expenditurefin_…Recorded expense.

Note: The prefix on venues, accommodations and partners is the subdomain of the artist platform — or, if the platform belongs to an agency, the name of the agency. The reason: those directories are shared within an agency.

Errors & status codes

Errors come back as JSON, together with an HTTP status code:

{ "error": "Token is invalid" }
CodeMeaning
400The request is incomplete, or a value is invalid or too long.
401The key is missing or invalid.
403The key lacks the required permission, the feature is a PRO feature, or the platform's license has expired — in which case the platform is read-only.
404The record or platform being addressed does not exist.
405The HTTP method does not fit the resource being addressed.
409The request contradicts the current state — for example a simple travel entry while travel is already planned individually.
423The record is locked (a closed settlement, for instance) and can no longer be changed.
500Unexpected error on the server.

Your platform's live docs

Every platform ships its own, always up-to-date API documentation. It sits right under the platform's address and is reachable without logging in:

https://{subdomain}/api/

It says the same as this chapter — but with the real values of your platform: the event types that actually apply including your own, your own setlist fields, every field of every write resource and the complete response fields of all endpoints.

Rule of thumb: The manual explains the principle; the live docs name the concrete IDs and fields of your platform.

Machine-readable: OpenAPI

The same description is also available as a file to import — an OpenAPI 3.1 specification (also known as a “Swagger file”). Use it to generate clients, fill API tools and set up integrations without retyping the documentation:

https://{subdomain}/api/openapi.json
https://{subdomain}/api/openapi.yaml

It, too, is generated by your platform and carries its values — your event type IDs, your own fields, the endpoints available on your platform. So simply fetch it again after changing your settings.

You will find both links in the platform as well, under SETTINGS > PLATFORM, right below the list of your API keys.

Platform-specific values

Some values differ from platform to platform because they come from your own settings and data. That is why they are not in this manual — but they can be queried directly at any time:

ValueQuery
Your own event types with their IDsGET /api/show_types
Your own setlist fieldsGET /api/setlist?songs=1
Templates and their IDsGET /api/templates
People and their IDsGET /api/crew
Price groups and guest list areas of an eventGET /api/guests
Your own expense categories and payment methodsGET /api/expenses
The feature set of the platformGET /api/capabilities

Important: Never hard-code the IDs of event types, templates or people into an integration. They differ per platform and can change — query first, then use.

Real-world examples

Showing tour dates on a website

One call is enough — it returns all upcoming events:

GET https://{subdomain}/api/shows?token=YOUR_API_KEY

Display events with the publication status “published” normally, and those with “tba” as an announcement without a date.

Honour releaseStart and releaseEnd so events appear and disappear automatically at the right moment.

Use ticketlinks for the ticket buttons and the sold-out flag inside them for the “sold out” label.

For an agency the same flow runs against the agency subdomain — filtered per artist if you like.

Pulling events in from another system

First create the event, then create the venue or take it from the directory and link it to the event:

POST  https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY
      { "date": "2026-09-01", "status": "tbc", "title": "Release Show", "showType": 0 }

POST  https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY&resource=venue
      { "name": "…", "city": "…" }

POST  https://{subdomain}/api/write?token=YOUR_API_KEY&resource=venue_link
      { "show": "{artist}_1234", "venue": "venue_{artist}_55" }

Run a name search in the directory beforehand to see whether the venue already exists — that way no duplicates pile up.

Filling in advancing data

A flow that has proven itself for integrations:

First read the event in full, so you know the current state.

Then add the missing pieces — venue, accommodation, partner, contact persons, catering, travel, schedules.

Finally read the result once more and compare it against your own source.

Tip: If you would rather not write code: the AI Assistant does exactly these jobs by chat, voice or email — behind the scenes it uses this very interface.